Difference between revisions of "Reference: MSEgui"

From Free Pascal wiki
Jump to navigationJump to search
 
(47 intermediate revisions by 3 users not shown)
Line 10: Line 10:
 
=== TMseFormWidget ===
 
=== TMseFormWidget ===
 
Use it in order to insert a tcustomform descendant into another widget at designtime. Does not try to load resources in "create".
 
Use it in order to insert a tcustomform descendant into another widget at designtime. Does not try to load resources in "create".
 +
<pre>
 +
        tmseform descendants ( MainForm, SimpleForm,.. )
  
=== TDockFormWidget ===
+
Client area of the form & parent of its widgets ( against which the widgets
=== TPaintbox ===
+
are placed and colored ) is presented by the "container" property
 +
not "container.frame.clientarea"
 +
 
 +
CanClose is called :
  
How to draw line (or circle) on tpaintbox? In event onpaint:
+
- on receiving "ek_close" by window
 +
- for modal window, on focus change
  
<syntaxhighlight lang=pascal>
+
- within parent window's "CanClose" where all nested windows are  
  procedure tmainfo.paintboxonpaint(const sender: twidget; const canvas: tcanvas);
+
checked for OnCloseQuery & OnClose - if any sets "mr_none" then the parent window
begin
+
can't close as well
  with sender,canvas do begin
+
  drawline(nullpoint,pointty(size),cl_yellow); 
+
- from nested window's "CanParentClose"
  //diagonal line across widget
+
- from own "CanParentClose"
  drawellipse(makerect(makepoint(bounds_cx div 2,bounds_cy div 2), size),cl_red);
 
  //circle (or ellipse) centered in widget                           
 
  end;
 
end;
 
</syntaxhighlight>
 
 
Makepoint and makerect are in msegraphutils.
 
  
=== TEventWidget ===
+
- some componnets build oneself in own "Loaded" procedure :
A widget which publishes all possible events of a twidget. Normally it is better to implement your own specialized descendant of an existing widget instead to use teventwidget.
+
= widget grids
 +
= database access components
 +
= ...
  
=== TButton ===
+
The "form.show" has parameter "transientfor".
* A rectangular clickable area that can show text/bitmap.
+
The window Z-order is above the "transientfor" window. The exact behaviour
- Main properties:
+
depends on the window manager.
Caption: read/write the text that appear on top of it.
+
       
onexecute: read/write the address of a procedure (event handler) to be executed when clicked.
+
        caption
 +
- run-time caption on the title bar
  
=== TStockGlyphButton ===
+
color
=== TRichButton ===
+
- color behind the client ( contaner ) area
=== TLabel ===
 
* Draws a piece of text on the given surface (canvas: screen/printer/bitmap).
 
- Main properties:
 
Caption: read/write the piece of text.
 
  
See also [[Reference:_MSEgui/TLabel|TLabel]]
+
container
 +
- the real parent of form's widgets, <see "tformscrollbox">
  
=== TGroupBox ===
+
cursor
=== TStepBox ===
+
- the mouse over cursor shape
=== TStringDisp ===
 
*A read only version of TStringEdit, difference from TLabel: has a frame around it.
 
-Main properties:
 
Value: read/write the text that are showed.
 
Caption: A label normally describing the purpose or meaning of the presented text, it can be positioned around the frame.
 
  
=== TByteStringDisp ===
+
enabled - "false" disables all child widgets
=== TIntegerDisp ===
 
=== TRealDisp ===
 
=== TDateTimeDisp ===
 
=== TBooleanDisp ===
 
=== TToolBar ===
 
=== TDrawGrid ===
 
=== TStringGrid ===
 
=== TTabBar ===
 
=== TTabPage ===
 
=== TTabWidget ===
 
=== TDockHandle ===
 
=== TDockPanel ===
 
=== TSpliter ===
 
<pre>
 
      A widget very similar to "tspacer" but :
 
- designed to rearrange areas occupied by adjacent widgets
 
- a linked widget may only enlarge by "eating" the opposite one,
 
so the summary area of both widgets don't change
 
- has GUI look ( hatched grip, color etc) switched on by default
 
- facilitates run-time repositioning oneself and linked widgets
 
- linked widgets may even be other splitters, spacers (with their linked widgets ),..
 
 
        Properties:
 
  
- color
+
face
= see {any_widget.color}
+
<see "tfacecomp"> + some more options
  
- cursor
+
font
= see {any_widget.cursor}
+
<see "tfont">
 +
 
 +
frame
 +
<see "tframecomp"> + some more options
 +
 +
icon
 +
<see "timage">
 +
 
 +
mainmenu
 +
<see tmainmenu>
  
- enabled
+
name
= "false" stops user interaction
+
- name to refer when programming
  
- face
+
options:
= see {any_face}
 
  
- frame
+
fo_main
= see {any_frame}
+
- assigns this from as the aplication GUI-face & event receiver
 +
- causes the icon of this form to be icon of the application
  
- colorgrip
+
fo_terminateonclose
= color of grip hatching
+
- causes the application to terminate once the form has closed ( doesn't depend on "fo_main" )
  
- grip
 
= defines hatching pattern of the grip
 
  
* stb_dens(N) : the pattern is of rhombuses, the painted rhombs occupy "N" persents of the grip
+
fo_freeonclose
 +
- causes the form (even being modal) to release its memory on closure or OK-return from "CanClose"
  
* stb_block(N) : the pattern is of squares, painted & unpainted squares are equally sized and
+
fo_defaultpos
both have "N" pixels sides
+
- lets the WM to position the form initially
 
* stb_hatchup(N) : the pattern is of right-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
 
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
 
  
* stb_hatchdown(N) : the pattern is of left-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
+
fo_screencentered
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
+
- causes the form initially to show in center of the apllication work area
  
* stb_crosshatch(N) : the pattern is of crossing (left & right) tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
+
fo_closeonesc
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
+
- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_ESCAPE & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
 +
fo_cancelonesc
 +
- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_CANCEL & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
- linkbottom/linkleft/linkright/linktop
+
fo_closeonenter
= see {tspacer.*}
+
- causes the form to close on "Enter" key pressed ( with MR_OK & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
- options
+
fo_closeonf10
 +
- causes the form to close on "F10" key pressed ( with MR_F10 & "OnCloseQuery" firing )
  
= spo_hmove
+
fo_globalshortcuts
* "true" allows the spliter to move horizontally
+
- allows on-this-form "ao_globalshortcut" actions to trigger
  
= spo_hprop
+
  Notes :
* "true" : keep the left position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
= shortcuts for modal not "fo_localshortcut" forms are processed by app
to weigth of the client area of parent
+
= shortcuts for "fo_globalshorcut" forms are processed by the owning window
  
= spo_hsizeprop
+
fo_localshortcuts
* "true" : keep width of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
- disables triggering shortcuts of on-this-form actions
to weigth of the client area of parent
 
* the width stops shrinking on one set in design time
 
  
= spo_vmove
+
fo_autoreadstat
* "true" allows the spliter to move vertically
+
- for "cs_ismodule" forms, before "OnLoaded" fires, rereads all statvars from the bound stafile/memorystream
  
= spo_vprop
+
fo_autowritestat
* "true" : keep the top position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
- in "CanClose", after "OnClose" fires [ and before app termination for "fo_terminateonlose" form ],
to height of the client area of parent
+
rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
 +
- for datamodules, does this before "OnDestroy" fires
  
= spo_vsizeprop
+
fo_savepos
* "true" : keep height of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
+
- saves/restores Z-order, size & scree coordinates of the form
to height of the client area of parent
+
as soon as the stat data are ready
* the height stops shrinking on one set in design time
 
  
= spo_dockleft
+
fo_savestate
* causes the "linkleft" widget to dock to the left border of splitter
+
- for top-level form, saves/restores "VSize", "Active" & "Visible"  
* make sence only if linkleft "widget.bounds_x" less than "splitter.bounds_x"
+
as soon as the stat data are ready
  
= spo_docktop
+
optionswidget
* causes the "linktop" widget to dock to the top border of splitter
+
<see "any widget">
* make sence only if linktop "widget.bounds_y" less than "splitter.bounds_y"
+
optionswindow
 +
<see "any window">
 +
popupmenu
 +
<see "tpopupmenu">
 +
stafile
 +
<see "tstafile">
 +
stavarname
 +
taborder
 +
tag
  
= spo_dockright
+
visible - for a form, only affects its childs widgets
* causes the "linkright" widget to dock to the right border of splitter
 
* make sence only if linkright "widget.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)" more than "splitter.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)"
 
  
= spo_dockbottom
+
Events:
* causes the "linkbottom" widget to dock to the bottom border of splitter
 
* make sence only if linkbottom "widget.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)" more than "splitter.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)"
 
  
!!! Two special cases :
+
activate = to set focused & redraw the invalidated area
  
1. (spo_dockleft = spo_dockright = TRUE) && (linkleft = linkright = the_same_widget) :
+
oncreate
causes the "linkleft" widget to adjust to h-positiion & width of the splitter,
+
- fires before "Loaded" procedure is called
it's even possible that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
+
- fires after creating the widget & its subwidgets but before the final arrangement
 +
- forms arent' yet visible on return
  
(spo_docktop = spo_dockbottom = TRUE) && (linktop = linkbottom = the_same_widget) :
+
  Since "Loaded" procedure hasn't yet worked at this point then
causes the "linktop" widget to adjust to v-position & height of the splitter,
+
database contents, values of widget grid's subwidgets
 +
are invalid in this event ***
  
It's even possible in these cases that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
+
onloaded
 +
- fires once "Loaded" procedure of owns & all form's widgets finishes
 +
- processed  after "OnCreate"
 +
- on finishing, forms aren't yet visible
  
- optionsscale
+
oneventloopstart ( main forms only )
= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}
+
- only applicable to main forms
 +
- fires once all application GUI is built and shown
 +
( and ready to user's interaction )
 +
 +
onactivate
 +
- see {any_widget.OnActivate}
  
- optionswidget
+
onenter
= see {anywidget.optionswidget}
+
= see {any_widget.OnEnter}
  
- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
+
onfocus
  onfontheightdelta, onmove, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
+
- see {any_widget.OnFocus}
= see "tspacer"
+
  
- onupdatelayout
+
onwindowactivechanged
fires :
+
- fires on :
+
= touching another window even on clicking in a behind-modal window ( or its title bar )
= on creating the splitter
+
= 1-st showing the window
= on any reposition of the linked widgets
+
- reactivating the window
( due to moving the splitter, resizing the parent,.. )
 
</pre>
 
  
=== TSpacer ===
+
onbeforepaint
* a regular widget which creates a kind of positional link between surrounding widgets
+
- fires at the very beginning of "paint", before drawing canvas
* designed to maintain distances between widgets
 
* may have GUI look, caption etc switched off by default
 
* resizing a spacer repositions its linked widgets
 
  
Properties:
+
onpaint
 +
- fires in "paint" procedure, between drawing canvas and contained widgets
  
- anchors
+
onafterpaint (doafterpaint)
= see {any_widget.anchors}
+
- fires just on return from "paint" procedure
  
- bounds
+
        onapplicationactivechanged
= see {any_widget.bounds}
+
- fires :
 +
= if the application gets/looses input focus
  
- color
+
onasyncevent (doasyncevent)
= see {any_widget.color}
+
- fires on calling {this_form}.asyncevent(atag) from any place of the application
 +
once delivered by the app even queue
  
- enabled
+
"atag" set by caller(s) helps to branch within "onasyncevent", to identify the caller, etc ***
= "false" turns color of the caption to gray
+
generally, doesn't fire instantly because these events are delivered through the app event queue ***
  
- visible
 
= "true" allows displayable settings (caption text, face, frame etc) to take
 
effect in run-time as well
 
 
- <face>
 
= see {any face}
 
  
- <frame>
+
onchildmouseevent
= see {any frame}
+
- fires on any mouse activity over its child widget(s) not the (containing) widget oneself
  
- linkbottom
+
      for forms, it even fires on enetering "container" therefore it appears as if to be the form itself ***
= widget linked down to most outer edge (incl. frame[.caption]) of the spacer
+
 
- linkleft
+
onchildscaled
= widget linked left to most outer edge of the spacer
+
- see {any_widget.OnChildScaled}
- linkright
 
= widget linked right to most outer edge of the spacer
 
- linktop
 
= widget linked up to most outer edge of the spacer
 
  
- dist_bottom, dist_left, dist_right, dist_top :
+
onclientmouseevent
= margins between most outer edge the spacer
+
- fires on any mouse activity over areas expecting user's mouse input (not titlebars/frames/...)
and the corresponding linked widget
 
  
- options :
+
onclose
 +
- fires in "CanClose" if "modalresult <> mr_none"
  
= spao_glueright
+
onclosequery
 +
- fires in "CanClose" before "OnClose"
 +
- "mr_none" set on return prevents the window (and its parent) from closing
 +
( "OnClose" is also bypassed )
  
  - if "false"
 
  
h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkleft widget shifts
+
ondeactivate
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift
+
- see {any_widget.OnDeactivate}
  
if {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer
+
ondefocus
may be right-resized with auto h-resizing the linkright widget
+
- see {any_widget.OnDeFocus}
so that the right margin of that widget is kept
+
 +
ondestroy
 +
- fires on in-code calling "BeforeDestruction"
  
if NOT {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer
+
ondestroyed
may be right-resized with auto h-shifting the linkright widget
+
- fires on return from the form's destructor ( when all resources are freed )
so that width of that widget is kept
 
  
- if "true"  
+
onterminatequery
 +
- fires on an attempt to terminate the app
 +
- by setting "var terminate:= false", allows to cancel termination
  
h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkright widget shifts
+
Termination by debugger/OS facilities can't be blocked this way ( win32 )***
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift
 
  
if {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer
+
onterminated
may be h-resized with auto h-resizing the linkleft widget
+
- fires for not-yet-destroyed forms, once the app event loop finishes
so that the left margin of that widget is kept
+
- may be caused by any closure of the main app form
 +
( app termination, WM/OS facilities, )
  
if NOT {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer
 
may be h-resized with auto h-shifting the linkleft widget
 
so that width of that widget is kept
 
  
= spao_gluebottom
+
onwindowdestroyed
 +
- fires once a descendant window is destroyed
 +
( for a main form, when a modal simple form is closed by any way,.. )
  
- if "false"  
+
onevent
 +
- fires on receiving an event
 +
= for simple forms, it's only "ek_loaded"
  
v-repositioning or v-resizing the linktop widget shifts
+
There can be more if the form is connected to object_event sending
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift
+
components or if the application uses object events, for example by calling
 +
tguicomponent.postcomponentevent. ****
  
if {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer
+
onexit
may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linkbottom widget
+
- see {any_widget.OnExit}
so that the bottom margin of that widget is kept
 
  
if NOT {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer
+
onfocusedwidgetchanged
may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linkbottom widget
+
- for a "prev-new" parent-wide focused wigdets pair, fires once installing new focus has finished,
so that height of that widget is kept
+
after "OnFocus"
 +
- resends for all contained widgets
 +
- doesn't fire if the "prev-new" pair don't really change
  
- if "true"
+
onfontheightdelta
 +
- see {any_widget.OnFontHeightDelta}
  
        v-repositioning or v-resizing the linkbottom widget shifts
+
onhide
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift
+
- fires at beginnig of own/parent's
 +
= hide
 +
= hidden
 +
= destroying
 +
= setting "visible:= false"
 +
= closing the window ( receiving event "ek_close",.. )
 +
= calling "window.close"
 +
 +
onidle
 +
- fires everytime when the app GUI event queue gets empty
 +
- to stop calling for a while, set "again" parameter to "false" (the initial value );
 +
 +
DON'T DO ANYTHING AFFECTING THE APP EVENT QUEUE ( MODAL WINDOWS, "ShowMessage", Sleep(N),... ) IN THIS HANDLER.
 +
MODAL WINDOWS CAUSE RECURSION !
 +
 +
A code fragment:
  
if {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer
+
again:= i < 5;
may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linktop widget
+
if not again then exit;
so that the top margin of that widget is kept
 
  
if NOT {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer
+
onkeydown
may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linktop widget
+
- fires on pressing down a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused
so that height of that widget is kept
 
  
- optionsscale
+
onkeyup
= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}
+
- fires on releasing a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused
  
- optionswidget
+
onmouseevent
= see {anywidget.optionswidget}
+
- fires on any mouse activity over the client area
  
- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
+
onmove
  onfontheightdelta, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
+
- see {any_window.OnMove}
= see {any_widget.*}
 
  
- onmove
+
onpopup
= see {any_window.OnMove}
+
- see {any_widget.OnPopup}
  
any "link*" option set disables the spacer to reposition solely,
+
onresize
repositioning is only controlled by a "glued" widget since then
+
- see {any_widget.OnResize}
  
=== TLayouter ===
+
onshortcut
* a tspacer descendant designed to (auto)resize or/and move its contained widgets acc to some size/positon dependencies
+
- fires before built-in shorcut processing
* may have GUI look, frame caption etc switched off by default
+
- "info.eventstate=es_processed" set in "OnShortcut" prevents
* layouters may be nested to achieve copmplex layouts
+
the event from further auto-processing
  
Each layout change/assignment is divided into performing 3 consequent stages :
+
The app
 +
- recognizes & takes registered shortcuts from app event queue
 +
- passes the shocrcut event to each of its windows until the event
 +
is processed otherwise processes it by oneself
 +
  
==== Stage 1 ====
+
onshow
 +
- fires if the widget is visible:
 +
= on calling "Show" method
 +
= on return from "Loaded" procedure
 +
= on showing the parent widget
 +
- since called at end, allows to adjust the default behavior
  
Widgets auto resized using the following options:
+
onshowhint
 +
- see {any_widget.OnShowHint}
  
<pre>
+
onstatbeforeread
- if {lao_placex OR lao_placey} :
+
- fires before loading statvars  from the disk file
  
= if {plo_scalesize in optionslayout}  then
+
onstatafterread
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" are h-scaled
+
- fires once statvars are loaded from the disk file
    in the proportion of change of tlayouter's clientwidth
 
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" are v-scaled
 
    in the proportion  of change of tlayouter's clientheight
 
  
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
+
onstatupdate
 +
- fires at 1-st stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars
 +
or
 +
- fires at pre-last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"
  
|--Widget__1---Widget__2--| => the initial look
+
onstatread
 +
- fires at 2-nd stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars
  
  |--Widget_1--Widget_2--| => the layouter gets narrower
+
onstatwrite
 +
- fires at last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"
  
  |---Widget___1---Widget___2---| => the layouter gets wider
+
pon stat reading, non-minimized visible windows are shown,
 +
the active window is activated
  
*** both widget sizes & margins are affected ***
+
</pre>
*** Widget_N may generally situate on different y-levels ***
+
=== TDockFormWidget ===
 
+
=== TPaintbox ===
otherwise :
 
  
= if lao_scalewidth in optionslayout :
+
How to draw line (or circle) on tpaintbox? In event onpaint:
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
 
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are h-scaled in the proportion
 
  as far as clientwidth of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
 
  
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
+
<syntaxhighlight lang=pascal>
 
+
procedure tmainfo.paintboxonpaint(const sender: twidget; const canvas: tcanvas);
  |--Single____widget????| => the initial look
+
begin
 
+
  with sender,canvas do begin
  |--Single__widget???| => the layouter gets narrower
+
  drawline(nullpoint,pointty(size),cl_yellow); 
 +
  //diagonal line across widget
 +
  drawellipse(makerect(makepoint(bounds_cx div 2,bounds_cy div 2), size),cl_red);
 +
  //circle (or ellipse) centered in widget                           
 +
  end;
 +
end;
 +
</syntaxhighlight>
 +
 +
Makepoint and makerect are in msegraphutils.
  
  |--Single_______widget?????| => the layouter gets wider
+
=== TEventWidget ===
 +
A widget which publishes all possible events of a twidget. Normally it is better to implement your own specialized descendant of an existing widget instead to use teventwidget.
  
* also, if {lao_scaleleft in optionslayout} then left margins of the widgets
+
=== TButton ===
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_nopropleft" resize too otherwise retain
+
* A rectangular clickable area that can show text/bitmap.
 +
- Main properties:
 +
Caption: read/write the text that appear on top of it.
 +
onexecute: read/write the address of a procedure (event handler) to be executed when clicked.
  
= if lao_scaleheight in optionslayout :
+
=== TStockGlyphButton ===
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
+
=== TRichButton ===
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are v-scaled in the proportion
+
=== TLabel ===
    as far as clientheight of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
+
* Draws a piece of text on the given surface (canvas: screen/printer/bitmap).
 +
- Main properties:
 +
Caption: read/write the piece of text.
  
* also, if {lao_scaletop in optionslayout} then top margins of the widgets
+
See also [[Reference:_MSEgui/TLabel|TLabel]]
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_noproptop" resize too otherwise retain
 
  
*** only widget sizes & margins not distances between them are affected ***
+
=== TGroupBox ===
 
+
=== TStepBox ===
</pre>
+
=== TStringDisp ===
 
+
*A read only version of TStringEdit, difference from TLabel: has a frame around it.
==== Stage 2 ====  
+
-Main properties:
 
+
Value: read/write the text that are showed.
Widgets may be auto resized in 5 consequent steps using the following options:
+
Caption: A label normally describing the purpose or meaning of the presented text, it can be positioned around the frame.
  
 +
=== TByteStringDisp ===
 +
=== TIntegerDisp ===
 +
=== TRealDisp ===
 +
=== TDateTimeDisp ===
 +
=== TBooleanDisp ===
 +
=== TToolBar ===
 +
=== TDrawGrid ===
 +
=== TStringGrid ===
 +
=== TTabBar ===
 +
=== TTabPage ===
 +
=== TTabWidget ===
 +
=== TDockHandle ===
 +
=== TDockPanel ===
 +
=== TSpliter ===
 
<pre>
 
<pre>
 +
      A widget very similar to "tspacer" but :
 +
- designed to rearrange areas occupied by adjacent widgets
 +
- a linked widget may only enlarge by "eating" the opposite one,
 +
so the summary area of both widgets don't change
 +
- has GUI look ( hatched grip, color etc) switched on by default
 +
- facilitates run-time repositioning oneself and linked widgets
 +
- linked widgets may even be other splitters, spacers (with their linked widgets ),..
 +
 +
        Properties:
  
1. if plo_syncmaxautosize in place_options :
+
- color
  = all widgets are autosized then their client areas are synchronised to the
+
= see {any_widget.color}
    clientareas of the highest and the widest of the widget
+
 
  * calls "msegui.syncmaxautosize"
+
- cursor
 +
= see {any_widget.cursor}
  
2. if plo_syncpaintwidth in place_options :
+
- enabled
  = the paintwidths of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
+
= "false" stops user interaction
    widest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" )
 
  * mainly makes sense if "lao_alignx" set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
 
    ( see below ) when the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the
 
    inner client width of tlayouter:
 
  
                                  x-align level         
+
- face
                                        V               
+
= see {any_face}
                        +----------------------------------+
 
                        | Widget_1 the_widest_frame_caption|
 
                        | Widget_2 frame_caption2          |
 
                        | Widget_N wider_frame_captionN    |
 
                        +----------------------------------+
 
  
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_right" frame captions
+
- frame
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) width
+
= see {any_frame}
    // of the Z-top widget
 
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintwidth"
 
  * paintwidth is the outer width
 
  
3. if plo_syncpaintheight in place_options :
+
- colorgrip
  = the paintheights of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
+
= color of grip hatching
    highest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" ).
 
  * mainly makes sense if lao_aligny set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
 
    ( see below ) the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the inner
 
    client height of tlayouter :
 
  
                        +------------------------------+
+
- grip
                        | The_                        |
+
= defines hatching pattern of the grip
                        | tallest_            taller_  |
 
                        | frame_    frame_    frame_  |
 
                        | caption  caption2  captionN | 
 
                        |                              |
 
                        | Widget1  Widget_2  Widget_N |<== y-align level
 
                        +------------------------------+   
 
  
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_topleft" frame captions
+
* stb_dens(N) : the pattern is of rhombuses, the painted rhombs occupy "N" persents of the grip
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption )
 
    // height of the Z-top widget
 
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintheight"
 
 
4. plo_synccaptiondistx in place_options :
 
  = causes all widgets to have the widest common room for their cp_(left/right)* frame captions
 
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondistx"
 
 
5. plo_synccaptiondisty in place_options :
 
  = causes all widgets to have the highest common room for their cp_(top/bottom)* frame captions
 
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondisty"
 
</pre>
 
  
==== Stage 3 ====
+
* stb_block(N) : the pattern is of squares, painted & unpainted squares are equally sized and
 +
both have "N" pixels sides
 +
 +
* stb_hatchup(N) : the pattern is of right-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
 +
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
  
The widgets may be (re)arranged within the layouter.  
+
* stb_hatchdown(N) : the pattern is of left-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
 +
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
 +
 
 +
* stb_crosshatch(N) : the pattern is of crossing (left & right) tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
 +
each "N"-th pixel forms these lines
 +
 
 +
 
 +
- linkbottom/linkleft/linkright/linktop
 +
= see {tspacer.*}
  
<pre>
+
- options
There're 2 modes of such (re)arrangement which can be partially (orthogonally)
 
combined (see later):
 
  
1) The place(ment) mode ( lao_place* in optionslayout ) :
+
= spo_hmove
 +
* "true" allows the spliter to move horizontally
  
- widgets are placed at some distances between each other, possibly with some
+
= spo_hprop
  margins, rooms of invisible widgets ( having visible=false) are also allocated
+
* "true" : keep the left position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )  
  unless "plo_noinvisible in place_options"
+
to weigth of the client area of parent
  
  * the widgets are placed in the order of decreasing their "widgetrect.x"
+
= spo_hsizeprop
coordinates before alignment
+
* "true" : keep width of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
 
+
to weigth of the client area of parent
  * the inter-widget distances and the side margins ( if apllied ) in both
+
* the width stops shrinking on one set in design time
dimentions are identical and limited between "place_mindist" and
+
 
"place_maxdist"
+
= spo_vmove
 
+
* "true" allows the spliter to move vertically
  = if {lao_placex in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the
+
 
following relevant settings apply:
+
= spo_vprop
 
+
* "true" : keep the top position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" :
+
to height of the client area of parent
+
 
# |Widget_1------Widget_2------Widget_3|
+
= spo_vsizeprop
+
* "true" : keep height of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time )
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
+
to height of the client area of parent
+
* the height stops shrinking on one set in design time
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
+
 
+
= spo_dockleft
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} :
+
* causes the "linkleft" widget to dock to the left border of splitter
+
* make sence only if linkleft "widget.bounds_x" less than "splitter.bounds_x"
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_3????|
+
 
+
= spo_docktop
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} and
+
* causes the "linktop" widget to dock to the top border of splitter
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
+
* make sence only if linktop "widget.bounds_y" less than "splitter.bounds_y"
+
 
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
+
= spo_dockright
+
* causes the "linkright" widget to dock to the right border of splitter
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} :
+
* make sence only if linkright "widget.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)" more than "splitter.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)"
+
 
# |??????Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3|
+
= spo_dockbottom
+
* causes the "linkbottom" widget to dock to the bottom border of splitter
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
+
* make sence only if linkbottom "widget.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)" more than "splitter.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)"
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
+
 
+
!!! Two special cases :
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
+
 
+
1. (spo_dockleft = spo_dockright = TRUE) && (linkleft = linkright = the_same_widget) :
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_center} :
+
causes the "linkleft" widget to adjust to h-positiion & width of the splitter,
+
it's even possible that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
+
 
+
(spo_docktop = spo_dockbottom = TRUE) && (linktop = linkbottom = the_same_widget) :
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
+
causes the "linktop" widget to adjust to v-position & height of the splitter,
 
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_____3|, or
 
 
# |Widget_1----Widget_____2----Widget_3|, or
 
 
# |Widget_____1----Widget_2----Widget_3|, here, the most left amongst
 
widgets having both [an_left,an_right] set is expanded otherwise the most
 
right widget ( Widget_3 in the example )
 
 
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
 
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
 
 
 
# |--Widget_1--Widget_____2--Widget_3--|,
 
 
 
The Legend:
 
===========
 
limiting value of "place_maxdist" : such value which produce some visual
 
effect on the layouter
 
 
  "----" :           distance ( = number of minuses, limited by place_maxdis )
 
  "????" :          some remaining space ( = number of questmarks )
 
  "Widget_1" :      widget of the original size
 
  "Widget__..__1" : (auto)resized widget
 
 
 
  = if {lao_placey in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the things
 
are handled in the same manner as with "lao_placex" but for the vertical
 
"top2bottom" direction of placement instead of the horizontal "left2right" one.
 
  
2) the align(ment) mode ( optionslayout.lao_align* ) :
+
It's even possible in these cases that the widget doesn't touch the splitter
  
- widgets are gathered into a visual group to a dedicated "leader" widget of
+
- optionsscale
  the layout ( set by "align_leader" and defaults to the lowest in
+
= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}
  Z-Order = twidget.widgets[0] ) the leader stays in place while the others :
 
  
  = if lao_alignx in optionslayout ( the hor alignment mode ):
+
- optionswidget
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
+
= see {anywidget.optionswidget}
snap their left borders to the left border of leader
+
 
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
+
- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
snap their right borders to the right border of leader
+
  onfontheightdelta, onmove, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
+
= see "tspacer"
snap their v-axes to the v-axis of leader after that,
 
  = if lao_aligny in optionslayout ( the vert alignment mode ):
 
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
 
snap their top borders to the top border of leader
 
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
 
snap their bottom borders to the bottom border of leader
 
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
 
snap their h-axes to the h-axis of leader
 
  
- after that, the whole widget group can be aligned within the layouter:
+
- onupdatelayout
 +
fires :
 +
 +
= on creating the splitter
 +
= on any reposition of the linked widgets
 +
( due to moving the splitter, resizing the parent,.. )
 +
</pre>
  
  = if align_glue = wam_start
+
=== TSpacer ===
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
+
* a regular widget which creates a kind of positional link between surrounding widgets
the left extent of group snaps to the left border of layouter
+
* designed to maintain distances between widgets
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
+
  * may have GUI look, caption etc switched off by default
the top extent of group snaps to the top border of layouter
+
* resizing a spacer repositions its linked widgets
  = else if align_glue = wam_end
 
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 
the right extent of group snaps to the right border of layouter
 
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 
the bottom extent of group snaps to the bottom border of layouter
 
  = else if align_glue = wam_center
 
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 
the v-axis of group snaps to the v-axis of layouter
 
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 
the h-axis of group snaps to the h-axis of layouter
 
  
Mutually exclusive settings:
+
Properties:
* only one of "align_mode" can be choosen
 
* only one of  "glue_mode" can be choosen
 
* "optionslayout.lao_alignx" & "optionslayout.lao_placex"
 
* "optionslayout.lao_aligny" & "optionslayout.lao_placey"
 
  
V-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_aligny ) may be combined with h-placement
+
- anchors
( optionslayout.lao_placex ), and h-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_alignx ) may
+
= see {any_widget.anchors}
be combined with v-placement ( optionslayout.lao_placey )
 
  
NOTE:
+
- bounds
  The effects of the above described { resizing / placement / alignment } are
+
= see {any_widget.bounds}
  irreversible. So, the only way to revert is to set "wan_none" then to revert
 
  manually.
 
</pre>
 
  
=== TListView ===
+
- color
=== TImage ===
+
= see {any_widget.color}
<pre>
 
<any image>
 
  
*** Note that switch to the monochrome mode is irerreversible ! ***
+
- enabled
 +
= "false" turns color of the caption to gray
  
alignment:
+
- visible
 +
= "true" allows displayable settings (caption text, face, frame etc) to take
 +
effect in run-time as well
 +
 +
- <face>
 +
= see {any face}
  
By default, images are top-left aligned, with the original size preserved.
+
- <frame>
 +
= see {any frame}
  
al_xcentered = centers the image horizontally
+
- linkbottom
al_ycentered = centers the image vertically
+
= widget linked down to most outer edge (incl. frame[.caption]) of the spacer
 +
- linkleft
 +
= widget linked left to most outer edge of the spacer
 +
- linkright
 +
= widget linked right to most outer edge of the spacer
 +
- linktop
 +
= widget linked up to most outer edge of the spacer
  
al_right = docks the image to the right border of placeholder
+
- dist_bottom, dist_left, dist_right, dist_top :
al_bottom = docks the image to the bottom border of placeholder
+
= margins between most outer edge the spacer
 +
and the corresponding linked widget
  
al_grayed = fills non-transparent areas with the selected color
+
- options :
  
al_stretchx = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in width
+
= spao_glueright
al_stretchy = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in height
 
al_fit = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in both width & height
 
  
al_tiled = spawns the image & tile the whole  placeholder with the copies
+
  - if "false"
  
Interpolation mode while stretching
+
h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkleft widget shifts
 +
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift
  
al_intpol = antialiases as far as the size changes
+
if {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer
(the only working in Linux)
+
may be right-resized with auto h-resizing the linkright widget
al_or = interpolation pixel operation is "or" -> 1's are extended
+
so that the right margin of that widget is kept
al_and = interpolation pixel operation is "and" -> 0's are extended
 
( al_or and al_and only on win32, mainly useful for stretching of monochrome bitmaps) :
 
  
colorbackground = color of image transparent ( masked ) areas in monochrome
+
if NOT {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer
non-masked mode
+
may be right-resized with auto h-shifting the linkright widget
colorforeground = color of non-transparent areas in monochrome mode 
+
so that width of that widget is kept
  
options:
+
- if "true"
  
bmo_monochrome = fills non-transparent areas with "colorforeground",
+
h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkright widget shifts
also, in non-masked mode, fills transparent areas
+
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift
with "colorbackground"
 
  
bmo_masked = activates built-in image transparency {it "hides" transparent (masked) areas}
+
if {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer
bmo_colormask = applies faded edge transparency on the color masked areas in the image
+
may be h-resized with auto h-resizing the linkleft widget
 +
so that the left margin of that widget is kept
  
transparency = makes the image transparent as long as enlights areas behind
+
if NOT {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer
the image with the selected color
+
may be h-resized with auto h-shifting the linkleft widget
 +
so that width of that widget is kept
  
transparentcolor = for a non-masked image, assigns a color indicate transparency areas
+
= spao_gluebottom
( on matching areas, the image will be seen through )
+
 
<pre/>
+
- if "false"
 +
 
 +
v-repositioning or v-resizing the linktop widget shifts
 +
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift
 +
 
 +
if {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer
 +
may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linkbottom widget
 +
so that the bottom margin of that widget is kept
 +
 
 +
if NOT {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer
 +
may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linkbottom widget
 +
so that height of that widget is kept
  
=== TDial ===
+
-  if "true"
=== TChart ===
 
=== TChartRecorder ===
 
=== TPolygon ===
 
=== TPickWidget ===
 
=== TOpenglWidget ===
 
  
== TWidget stuff ==
+
        v-repositioning or v-resizing the linkbottom widget shifts
<pre>
+
the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift
  Properties:   
 
- name
 
- anchors
 
- bounds
 
- color
 
- enabled
 
- visible
 
- <face> : see {any face}
 
- <frame> : see {any frame}
 
    - hint
 
    - helpcontext
 
    - tag
 
    - taborder
 
    - cursor
 
    - optionswidget
 
    - optionsskin
 
    - popupmenu
 
   
 
twidget's event handlers:
 
   
 
- on(de)activate
 
- onbeforeupdateskin
 
- onafterupdateskin
 
- onchildscaled
 
- onfontheightdelta
 
- on(de)focus
 
- onenter
 
- onmove
 
- onpopup
 
- onresize
 
- onshowhint
 
     
 
align_glue :
 
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the align mode )
 
- wam_none
 
- wam_start
 
- wan_center
 
- wm_end
 
  
align_leader :
+
if {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer
the widget ( incl another spacer, splitter or layouter ) against which the aligment applies ( the reference widget )
+
may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linktop widget  
 +
so that the top margin of that widget is kept
  
align_mode :
+
if NOT {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer
  ( inner anchoring mode within widget group, in the align mode )
+
may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linktop widget
- wam_none
+
so that height of that widget is kept
- wam_start
 
- wan_center
 
- wm_end
 
  
// Place mode:
+
- optionsscale
 +
= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}
  
     
+
- optionswidget
place_mindist, place_maxdist:
+
= see {anywidget.optionswidget}
- in the place(ment) mode, limits distance between widgets
 
  ( these distance once calclated also define side margins if aplicable )
 
  
place_mode:
+
- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the place mode )
+
  onfontheightdelta, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
- wam_none
+
= see {any_widget.*}
- wam_start
 
- wan_center
 
- wm_end
 
  
place_options:
+
- onmove
- plo_endmargin
+
= see {any_window.OnMove}
= to resize a widget so that it "eats" extra space if it occurs
 
 
* only applicable in the place mode, with a limiting value of "place_maxdist" and:
 
  
  1) {place_mode <> wam_none}
+
any "link*" option set disables the spacer to reposition solely,
or
+
repositioning is only controlled by a "glued" widget since then
  2) {place_mode = wam_end} and {plo_propmargin in place_options}
 
  
For the exact look, see above
+
=== TLayouter ===
 +
* a tspacer descendant designed to (auto)resize or/and move its contained widgets acc to some size/positon dependencies
 +
* may have GUI look, frame caption etc switched off by default
 +
* layouters may be nested to achieve complex layouts
  
 +
Each layout change/assignment is divided into performing 3 consequent stages :
  
- plo_propmargin
+
==== Stage 1 ====
= виджеты расставляются теснее так, чтобы образовались отступы перед и после,
 
  причем расстояние между центрами виджетов было бы таким же,
 
  как и растояние между серединами крайних виджетов и соотв. границами зоны расстановки
 
  
- plo_syncmaxautosize
+
Widgets auto resized using the following options:
= see above
 
  
- plo_synccaptiondistx
+
<pre>
= see above
+
- if {lao_placex OR lao_placey} :
  
  * affects widgets with opposite cp_left/right set as well
+
= if {plo_scalesize in optionslayout}  then
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
+
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" are h-scaled
              * don't set cfo_captiondistouter here !
+
    in the proportion of change of tlayouter's clientwidth
 +
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" are v-scaled
 +
    in the proportion  of change of tlayouter's clientheight
  
- plo_synccaptiondisty
+
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
= see above
 
  
  * affects also widgets with opposite cp_top/bottom set
+
|--Widget__1---Widget__2--| => the initial look
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
 
  
              ! here, don't set "cfo_captiondistouter" for affected widgets !
+
  |--Widget_1--Widget_2--| => the layouter gets narrower
  
- plo_syncpaintwidth
+
  |---Widget___1---Widget___2---| => the layouter gets wider
= see above
 
  
- plo_syncpaintheight
+
*** both widget sizes & margins are affected ***
= see above
+
*** Widget_N may generally situate on different y-levels ***
 +
 
 +
otherwise :
  
- plo_scalesize
+
= if lao_scalewidth in optionslayout :
= see above
+
* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
 +
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are h-scaled in the proportion
 +
  as far as clientwidth of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
  
 +
For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :
  
dist_left, dist_right, dist_top, dist_bottom :
+
  |--Single____widget????| => the initial look
= margins between most outer edge the layouter and
 
  the corresponding linked widget
 
  
* see "tspacer" for detail
+
  |--Single__widget???| => the layouter gets narrower
  
linkleft,linkright,linktop,linkbottom : see "tspacer"
+
  |--Single_______widget?????| => the layouter gets wider
  
options:
+
* also, if {lao_scaleleft in optionslayout} then left margins of the widgets  
- spao_glueright, spao_gluebottom:
+
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_nopropleft" resize too otherwise retain
= set the adjustment dependencies between the layouter an its link_* widgets
 
  
* see "tspacer" for more details
+
= if lao_scaleheight in optionslayout :
 +
* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode
 +
  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are v-scaled in the proportion
 +
    as far as clientheight of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied
  
// which mode of widget placement to apply - see above
+
* also, if {lao_scaletop in optionslayout} then top margins of the widgets
optionslayout:
+
  with unset "optionsskin.osk_noproptop" resize too otherwise retain
- lao_alignx
 
- lao_aligny
 
- lao_placex
 
- lao_placey
 
- lao_scalewidth
 
- lao_scaleheight
 
- lao_scaleleft
 
- lao_scaletop
 
 
* lao_place* & lao_align* can't be combined for one direction
 
  
optionsscale:
+
*** only widget sizes & margins not distances between them are affected ***
 
 
  * cause the layouter to provide full space for the widgets as long as they expand/shrink/move
 
  
- osc_expandx
+
</pre>
= allocates more h-space if needed
 
  
- osc_shrinkx
+
==== Stage 2 ====
= removes extra h-space if occured
 
  
- osc_expandy
+
Widgets may be auto resized in 5 consequent steps using the following options:
= allocates more v-space if needed
 
  
- osc_shrinky
+
<pre>
= removes extra v-space if occured
 
  
- osc_invisishrinkx
+
1. if plo_syncmaxautosize in place_options :
= fully h-collapses the layouter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
+
  = all widgets are autosized then their client areas are synchronised to the
 +
    clientareas of the highest and the widest of the widget
 +
  * calls "msegui.syncmaxautosize"
  
- osc_invisishrinky
+
2. if plo_syncpaintwidth in place_options :
= fully v-collapses the layoter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
+
  = the paintwidths of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
 +
    widest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" )
 +
  * mainly makes sense if "lao_alignx" set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
 +
    ( see below ) when the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the
 +
    inner client width of tlayouter:
  
optionsskin:
+
                                  x-align level         
= see <any widget>
+
                                        V               
 +
                        +----------------------------------+
 +
                        | Widget_1 the_widest_frame_caption|
 +
                        | Widget_2 frame_caption2          |
 +
                        | Widget_N wider_frame_captionN    |
 +
                        +----------------------------------+
  
 +
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_right" frame captions
 +
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) width
 +
    // of the Z-top widget
 +
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintwidth"
 +
  * paintwidth is the outer width
  
Methods:
+
3. if plo_syncpaintheight in place_options :
 +
  = the paintheights of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
 +
    highest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" ).
 +
  * mainly makes sense if lao_aligny set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
 +
    ( see below ) the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the inner
 +
    client height of tlayouter :
  
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
+
                        +------------------------------+
 +
                        | The_                        |
 +
                        | tallest_            taller_  |
 +
                        | frame_    frame_    frame_  |
 +
                        | caption  caption2  captionN | 
 +
                        |                              |
 +
                        | Widget1  Widget_2  Widget_N |<== y-align level
 +
                        +------------------------------+   
  
<pre/>
+
  here, the effect is shown for "cp_topleft" frame captions
 +
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption )
 +
    // height of the Z-top widget
 +
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintheight"
 +
 +
4. plo_synccaptiondistx in place_options :
 +
  = causes all widgets to have the widest common room for their cp_(left/right)* frame captions
 +
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondistx"
 +
 +
5. plo_synccaptiondisty in place_options :
 +
  = causes all widgets to have the highest common room for their cp_(top/bottom)* frame captions
 +
  * calls "msegui.synccaptiondisty"
 +
</pre>
  
== Edit ==
+
==== Stage 3 ====
=== TStringEdit ===
 
=== TMemoEdit ===
 
=== THexStringEdit ===
 
=== TDropdownListEdit ===
 
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
 
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
 
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
 
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
 
  
=== THistoryEdit ===
+
The widgets may be (re)arranged within the layouter.  
A tstringedit which shows the previously entered values in a dropdownlist for selection.
 
  
=== TIntegerEdit ===
+
<pre>
=== TKeyStringEdit ===
+
There're 2 modes of such (re)arrangement which can be partially (orthogonally)
Maps string to string.
+
combined (see later):
  
=== TEnumEdit ===
+
1) The place(ment) mode ( lao_place* in optionslayout ) :
Maps integer to string, zero based and sequencial (first item 0, next 1, ...).
 
  
=== TEnumTypeEdit ===
+
- widgets are placed at some distances between each other, possibly with some
A tenumedit which maps Pascal enums to their names. Use oninit to store the typeinfo pointer of the enum type into sender.typeinfopo.
+
  margins, rooms of invisible widgets ( having visible=false) are also allocated
 +
  unless "plo_noinvisible in place_options"
  
=== TSelector ===
+
  * the widgets are placed in the order of decreasing their "widgetrect.x"
TSelector  is the most specialized widget of the dropdown editwidget group, it is based on tenumedit (tenumedit maps an integer to a string) and uses for the dropdownlist a second map which must be created on the fly in ongetdropdowninfo. An example is tcommselector where the enumedit maps commnrty to commname and the dropdownlist shows the available RS232 ports
+
coordinates before alignment
only.
+
 
 
+
  * the inter-widget distances and the side margins ( if apllied ) in both
=== TRealEdit ===
+
dimentions are identical and limited between "place_mindist" and
=== TRealSpinEdit ===
+
"place_maxdist"
=== TDateTimeEdit ===
+
 
=== TCalendarDateTimeEdit ===
+
  = if {lao_placex in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the
=== TEdit ===
+
following relevant settings apply:
MSEgui counterpart of Delphi TEdit. You will never use it.
+
 
 
+
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" :
=== TWidgetGrid ===
+
=== TItemEdit ===
+
# |Widget_1------Widget_2------Widget_3|
=== TDropDownItemEdit ===
+
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
+
* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
+
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
+
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
+
 
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} :
=== TMBDropDownItemEdit ===
+
=== TTreeItemEdit ===
+
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_3????|
=== TRecordFieldEdit ===
+
Used in twidgetgrid in order to edit fields of a ttreeitemedit. Example is MSEide projecttreeform.pas.
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} and
 
+
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
=== TDialogStringEdit ===
+
A tstringedit with an ellipse button. Use "onexecute" to show the dialog.
+
# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
 
+
=== TPointerEdit ===
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} :
=== TSlider ===
+
=== TProgressBar ===
+
# |??????Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3|
=== TBooleanEdit ===
+
=== TBooleanEditRadio ===
+
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
=== TDataButton ===
+
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
A button with an integer value. Clicking increments the value until "max", then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid. The current value selects the showed image and face by the items of "imagenums" and "valuefaces".
+
 +
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
 +
 +
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_center} :
 +
 +
# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
 +
 +
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
 +
 +
# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_____3|, or
 +
 +
# |Widget_1----Widget_____2----Widget_3|, or
 +
 +
# |Widget_____1----Widget_2----Widget_3|, here, the most left amongst
 +
widgets having both [an_left,an_right] set is expanded otherwise the most
 +
right widget ( Widget_3 in the example )
 +
 +
* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
 +
  {plo_propmargin in place_options} and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
 +
 
 +
# |--Widget_1--Widget_____2--Widget_3--|,
 +
 
 +
The Legend:
 +
===========
 +
limiting value of "place_maxdist" : such value which produce some visual
 +
effect on the layouter
 +
 +
  "----" :          distance ( = number of minuses, limited by place_maxdis )
 +
  "????" :          some remaining space ( = number of questmarks )
 +
  "Widget_1" :      widget of the original size
 +
  "Widget__..__1" : (auto)resized widget
 +
 
 +
  = if {lao_placey in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the things
 +
are handled in the same manner as with "lao_placex" but for the vertical
 +
"top2bottom" direction of placement instead of the horizontal "left2right" one.
  
=== TStockGlyphDataButton ===
+
2) the align(ment) mode ( optionslayout.lao_align* ) :
=== TDataIcon ===
 
Shows an imagelist item by lookup from "value" to "imagenums". Clicking increments value until "max" then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid.
 
  
=== TTextEdit ===
+
- widgets are gathered into a visual group to a dedicated "leader" widget of
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a text editor, used in MSEide source editor.
+
  the layout ( set by "align_leader" and defaults to the lowest in
 +
  Z-Order = twidget.widgets[0] ) the leader stays in place while the others :
  
=== TDataImage ===
+
  = if lao_alignx in optionslayout ( the hor alignment mode ):
A pixmap display widget which can be inserted into twidgetgrid.
+
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
 +
snap their left borders to the left border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
 +
snap their right borders to the right border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
 +
snap their v-axes to the v-axis of leader after that,
 +
  = if lao_aligny in optionslayout ( the vert alignment mode ):
 +
  * if align_mode = wam_start :
 +
snap their top borders to the top border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
 +
snap their bottom borders to the bottom border of leader
 +
  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
 +
snap their h-axes to the h-axis of leader
  
=== TTerminal ===
+
- after that, the whole widget group can be aligned within the layouter:
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a very simple terminal emulator. Used in MSEide target console.
 
  
== Properties for all widgets ==
+
  = if align_glue = wam_start
<pre>
+
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 
+
the left extent of group snaps to the left border of layouter
name
+
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 +
the top extent of group snaps to the top border of layouter
 +
  = else if align_glue = wam_end
 +
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 +
the right extent of group snaps to the right border of layouter
 +
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 +
the bottom extent of group snaps to the bottom border of layouter
 +
  = else if align_glue =  wam_center
 +
  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
 +
the v-axis of group snaps to the v-axis of layouter
 +
  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
 +
the h-axis of group snaps to the h-axis of layouter
  
anchors
+
Mutually exclusive settings:
 +
* only one of "align_mode" can be choosen
 +
* only one of  "glue_mode" can be choosen
 +
* "optionslayout.lao_alignx" & "optionslayout.lao_placex"
 +
* "optionslayout.lao_aligny" & "optionslayout.lao_placey"
  
-----------
+
V-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_aligny ) may be combined with h-placement
 +
( optionslayout.lao_placex ), and h-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_alignx ) may
 +
be combined with v-placement ( optionslayout.lao_placey )
  
- they control of design/runtime sticking widgets to their parents
+
NOTE:
 +
  The effects of the above described { resizing / placement / alignment } are
 +
  irreversible. So, the only way to revert is to set "wan_none" then to revert
 +
  manually.
 +
</pre>
  
- dimention pair ( top/bottom or left/right ) both set to "false" cause
+
=== TListView ===
the widget to fit the parent's client area in that dimention;
+
=== TImage ===
this effect may be partial in case of "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
+
<pre>
 +
<any image>
  
*** Return to the look "before dimention fit" is only possible by manual resizing or setting "bounds_*"
+
*** Note that switch to the monochrome mode is irerreversible ! ***
-----------
 
an_left
 
- on run-time, resizes/shifts left the widget to keep the design-set distance
 
between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
 
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
 
  
an_top
+
alignment:
- on run-time, resizes/shifts up the widget to keep the design-set distance
 
between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
 
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
 
  
an_right
+
By default, images are top-left aligned, with the original size preserved.
- on run-time, resizes/shifts right the widget to keep the design-set distance
 
between the widget's right border and the right side of parent's client area
 
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
 
  
an_bottom
+
al_xcentered = centers the image horizontally
- on run-time, resizes/shifts down the widget to keep the design-set distance
+
al_ycentered = centers the image vertically
between the widget's bottom border and the lower side of parent's client area
 
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
 
  
bounds
+
al_right = docks the image to the right border of placeholder
 +
al_bottom = docks the image to the bottom border of placeholder
  
cx - width of the widget
+
al_grayed = fills non-transparent areas with the selected color
cxmax, cxmin - design/runtime width of the widget is enforced between "cxmax" and "cxmin"
 
cy - height of the widget
 
cymax, cymin - design/runtime height of the widget is enforced between "cymax" and "cymin"
 
x - distance between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
 
y - distance between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
 
  
 +
al_stretchx = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in width
 +
al_stretchy = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in height
 +
al_fit = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in both width & height
  
autosize
+
al_tiled = spawns the image & tile the whole  placeholder with the copies
  
-----------
+
Interpolation mode while stretching
- only appliable to widgets with "ow_autosize" set
 
- the effect may be partial in case when "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
 
-----------
 
  
cx - addition to width of the widget (with h-centering post applied)
+
al_intpol = antialiases as far as the size changes
cy - addition to height of the widget (with v-centering post applied)
+
(the only working in Linux)
 +
al_or = interpolation pixel operation is "or" -> 1's are extended
 +
al_and = interpolation pixel operation is "and" -> 0's are extended
 +
( al_or and al_and only on win32, mainly useful for stretching of monochrome bitmaps) :
  
- color
+
colorbackground = color of image transparent ( masked ) areas in monochrome
= the default color of client area & caption text background
+
non-masked mode
= may be overwtitten:
+
colorforeground = color of non-transparent areas in monochrome mode 
* the client area - with "frame.colorclient"
 
* the caption BG - with "frame.font.colorbackground"
 
  
- font
+
options:
= see {any font}
 
  
- frame
+
bmo_monochrome = fills non-transparent areas with "colorforeground",
= see {any frame}
+
also, in non-masked mode, fills transparent areas
 +
with "colorbackground"
  
- face
+
bmo_masked = activates built-in image transparency {it "hides" transparent (masked) areas}
= see {any face}
+
bmo_colormask = applies faded edge transparency on the color masked areas in the image
  
- hint
+
transparency = makes the image transparent as long as enlights areas behind
= descriptive text appearing when mouse pointer enters the widget
+
the image with the selected color
  
- cursor
+
transparentcolor = for a non-masked image, assigns a color indicate transparency areas
= shape of the mouse pointer over the client area of widget (run-time only)
+
( on matching areas, the image will be seen through )
 +
</pre>
  
- visible
+
=== TDial ===
= "true" allow the widget to appear ( run-time only )
+
=== TChart ===
  
- enabled
+
There are demos here:
= "true" allows the widget to participate in GUI interaction
 
= "false" disallows the widget & its childs :
 
* processing all events & shortcuts & menu calls
 
* auto "CanClose" check
 
  
Also "false" usually aints the widget in color marking
+
https://github.com/mse-org/mseuniverse/tree/master/attic/msedocumenting/mse/trunk/help/tutorials/widgets/charts
the "disabled" state ( usually light gray font color )
 
  
- popupmenu
+
=== TChartRecorder ===
= reference to a preset tpopupmenu widget serving the right-click menu
+
=== TPolygon ===
 +
=== TPickWidget ===
 +
=== TOpenglWidget ===
  
- taborder
+
== Edit ==
- {0..N} order number when TAB-key cycling through widgets in the container
+
=== TStringEdit ===
 +
=== TMemoEdit ===
 +
=== THexStringEdit ===
 +
=== TDropdownListEdit ===
 +
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
 +
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
 +
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
 +
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
  
- tag
+
=== THistoryEdit ===
- an integer value bound to this widget instance
+
A tstringedit which shows the previously entered values in a dropdownlist for selection.
  
- helpcontext
+
=== TIntegerEdit ===
= a string returned by "(active/mouse)helpcontext" methods of the owning form
+
=== TKeyStringEdit ===
  when this widget is focued or under mouse in the active window
+
Maps string to string.
  
- zorder
+
=== TEnumEdit ===
= reading: finds the current Z-order of the widget's window
+
Maps integer to string, zero based and sequencial (first item 0, next 1, ...).
= setting: if the value = 0 then lowers the widget's window in the stacking hierarchy, otherwise rises
 
  
 +
=== TEnumTypeEdit ===
  
optionswidget:
+
A TEnumEdit which maps Pascal enums to their names. Use OnInit event to store the typeinfo pointer of the enum type into '''sender.typeinfopo'''.
  
ow_background
+
<syntaxhighlight lang=pascal>
- keeps the window/widget on bottom of the Z-order stack.
+
procedure tmainfo.enumtypeeditinit(const sender: tenumtypeedit);
 +
begin
 +
  sender.typeinfopo := PTypeInfo(TypeInfo(TMyEnumeratedType));
 +
end;
 +
</syntaxhighlight>
  
ow_top
+
=== TSelector ===
- keeps the window/widget in foreground
+
TSelector  is the most specialized widget of the dropdown editwidget group, it is based on tenumedit (tenumedit maps an integer to a string) and uses for the dropdownlist a second map which must be created on the fly in ongetdropdowninfo. An example is tcommselector where the enumedit maps commnrty to commname and the dropdownlist shows the available RS232 ports
 +
only.
  
ow_noautosizing
+
=== TRealEdit ===
- when docking, not to resize for the docking area
+
=== TRealSpinEdit ===
 +
=== TDateTimeEdit ===
 +
=== TCalendarDateTimeEdit ===
 +
=== TEdit ===
 +
MSEgui counterpart of Delphi TEdit. You will never use it.
  
ow_mousefocus
+
=== TWidgetGrid ===
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with mouse
+
=== TItemEdit ===
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on mouse clicks )
+
=== TDropDownItemEdit ===
 +
A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
 +
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
 +
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
 +
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.
  
ow_tabfocus
+
=== TMBDropDownItemEdit ===
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with "TAB" key
+
=== TTreeItemEdit ===
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on TAB pressed )
+
=== TRecordFieldEdit ===
 +
Used in twidgetgrid in order to edit fields of a ttreeitemedit. Example is MSEide projecttreeform.pas.
  
ow_parenttabfocus
+
=== TDialogStringEdit ===
- enters the childs on TAB-focusing then returns to the widget after
+
A tstringedit with an ellipse button. Use "onexecute" to show the dialog.
sequential TAB-ing through its child widgets,
 
otherwise TAB-ing cycles on the childs if entered
 
  
ow_arrowfocus
+
=== TPointerEdit ===
- allows the widget ( and its childs in turn ) to be focused with
+
=== TSlider ===
the arrow keys
+
=== TProgressBar ===
 +
=== TBooleanEdit ===
 +
=== TBooleanEditRadio ===
 +
=== TDataButton ===
 +
A button with an integer value. Clicking increments the value until "max", then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid. The current value selects the showed image and face by the items of "imagenums" and "valuefaces".
  
ow_subfocus, ow_arrowfocusin, ow_arrowfocusout
+
=== TStockGlyphDataButton ===
- in case of arrow keys focusing enabled for child-containing widget,
+
=== TDataIcon ===
determine behaviour on entering & leaving the widget, see the below table:
+
Shows an imagelist item by lookup from "value" to "imagenums". Clicking increments value until "max" then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid.
  
ow_subfocus | ow_arrowfocusin | ow_arrowfocusout | effect
+
=== TTextEdit ===
 +
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a text editor, used in MSEide source editor.
  
  FALSE          FALSE            FALSE        entering-/leaving-
+
=== TDataImage ===
  FALSE          FALSE            TRUE          entering-/leaving+
+
A pixmap display widget which can be inserted into twidgetgrid.
  FALSE          TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
 
  FALSE          TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
 
  TRUE            FALSE            FALSE        entering(last focused)+/leaving-
 
  TRUE            FALSE            TRUE          entering(last focused)+/leaving+
 
  TRUE            TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
 
  TRUE            TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
 
  
- "entering" is focusing on a child within the widget
+
=== TTerminal ===
- "leaving"  is return from last child onto the widget's level
+
Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a very simple terminal emulator. Used in MSEide target console.
- "nearest" is the child closest on the arrow direction
 
- "last focused" is the child focused on last leaving the widget
 
 
*** The Up/Down arrow keys can leave from the childs circle,  
 
but Left/Right can only toggle between the childs ***
 
  
*** mouse entering/leaving isn't controllable by these options
+
== NoGui ==
 +
=== TAction ===
 +
<pre>
 +
Shortcut processing order :
  
 +
- the smallest piece of processing is "doshortcut" procedure which
 +
is called until processed:
 +
= starting from the sender up to the toplevel widget
 +
= then by all child widgets with non-set "ow_noparentshortcut"
 +
= then, if "ow_nochildshortcut" isn't set, by the parent widget
 +
= then by the widget oneself
 +
 +
- "doshortcut" is checked in the following order:
 +
= starting from form's main menu
 +
= then from the owning window ( the widget oneself )
 +
= then from the application
  
ow_focusbackonesc
 
- on pressing "Esc", returns input focus to the previously focused widget
 
  
ow_noparentshortcut
+
*** A shortcut is bound to a widget by :
 +
- placing an action component on the widget ***
 +
- direct assigning the shortcut to the widget (menus,..)
 +
---------------------------
  
*** disables processing of delegated ( from the parent ) shortcuts ***
+
caption, color, colorglyph, helpcontext, hint, imagecheckedoffset,
 +
imagelist <see "timagelist">, imagenr, imagenrdisabled
  
- "true" here disables processing shortcuts if they're delegated
+
- sets look of "clients" (buttons, menu/toolbar items,..), unless
from the parent widget ( obviously, not processed by the parent )
+
these clients have "state.as_local*" set :
  
ow_nochildshortcut
+
*** For meaning of these options, see help on the "client" widgets ***
  
*** disables delegating shortcuts to the parent for taking desision ***
+
group
 +
- default value for one-named property of the bound widgets
 +
( menu items,... )
  
- if "true" then the widget tries to process it by oneself
+
options :
otherwise it's passed to the parent widget for further chaining
+
ao_updateonidle
 +
- runs this action in cycle, waiting for no gui events everytime
  
*** A shortcut can only be processed once ( by one widget ) ***
+
ao_globalshortcut
 +
- allows the action to trigger on a non-main form
 +
  (the shortcut is triggered whatever form of the applicatin it was pressed on,
 +
  otherwise only when the form where the aption is placed on is focused )
  
ow_canclosenil
+
ao_nocandefocus
- "true" here allows to continue even if there's contained widget(s)  
+
- causes the action not to call "CanDefocus" for focused edit widget of active form
not passing "CanClose" check
+
  before executing own code
 +
  ( it helps to avoid the effect of cancelling changes in these widgets
 +
  on activating the bound shortcut )
  
ow_mousetransparent
+
shortcut
- "true" here causes the widget oneself ( not its contained ones )
+
- keyboard combination triggering the action
not to react to mouse events ( just allow them through to the childs )
 
  
ow_mousewheel
+
shortcut
- enables/disables {scrolling/navigating} with wheel of ImPS/2 etc mouse
+
- alternative "shortcut" and handled identically
  
ow_noscroll
+
state :
- don't use screen image scrolling for twidget.scrollrect,
 
redraw the whole scrolled widget rectangle instead;
 
sometimes needed with background fades.
 
  
ow_nochildpaintclip
+
as_disabled
-  
+
- prevents the action from triggering, also puts the bound widgets to "disabled" look
  
ow_destroywidgets
+
as_invisible
- "true" here causes calling "free" for all containing widgets as well
+
- in run-time, hides the bound widget, still reacting on the shortcut or direct call
  
ow_hinton
+
as_checked
- to show the hint even in case of hinting is disabled on the parent
+
- selects the bound menu item if it has "mao_checkbox" option set
( "parent.ow_hintoff= true & parent.ow_hinton= false" )
 
  
ow_hintoff
+
as_default
- "true" here combined with "ow_hinton=false" fully disables displaying the hint
+
as_local*
  
ow_multiplehint
+
statfile
- "true" here causes the widget to redisplay its hint on each {>3px} move within the widget oneself
+
<see "tstatfile">
  
*mse ow_timedhint
+
stavarname
- "true" here causes hint of the widget to disappear after a timed inteval (about 2 secs by default)
 
  
ow_fontlineheight (design-time only)
+
- causes "extraspace" of the last text line to be drawn,
+
tagaction
in turn it causes adjustment of widget height if "ow_autoscale" is set
+
onasyncevent
+
onchange
*** makes sence only if "ow_autoscale=true" & ow_autosize=false & "extraspace <> 0" ***
+
onexecute
 +
onupdate
 +
</pre>
  
ow_fontglyphheight (design-time only)
+
=== TActivator ===
- causes only interline "extraspace"-s to be drawn, opposite to "ow_fontlineheight"
+
=== TCustomLookupbuffer ===
 +
<pre>
 +
- provides a group of parallel arrays of float(=datetime), integer and widestring types,
 +
and facilities to :
 +
= search in any array
 +
= on found position, quickly obtain corresponding value in another array
 +
- for each type, several arrays  may be kept
 +
- each array is integer-indexed, even string ones ( case[in]sensitive )
 +
- uses two way of accessing arrays data, through :
 +
= physic : array storage index ( row number ) directly
 +
= logical : the integer index ( see above ):
 +
first, physic row number is known for the logical index then the data
 +
are accessed with the found number
  
ow_autoscale (design-time only)
+
*** logical index values are built automatically based on array values,
- causes that if the contents change (design OR run-time) so that its' height changes
+
on updating its data ***
then the widget will be v-scaled as well
+
- dont' have interface to load data ( see its descendants for that )
 +
 +
fieldcountfloat - number of float arrays
 +
fieldcountinteger - number of integer arrays
 +
fieldcounttext - number of widestring arrays
  
ow_autosize (design-time only)
+
Event handlers:
- causes that widget's heigh & width & client area adjust so that to provide space for contents of the client area
+
- onchange
- no desing-time change of height/width are possible as long as this option is in effect
 
  
ow_autosizeanright
+
Public interface:
- when autosizing & {an_right isn't set}, the design-set right margin against the parent is preserved
 
  
ow_autosizeanbottom
+
  procedure beginupdate; - marks beginning of "update"
- when autosizing & {an_bottom isn't set}, the design-set bottom margin against the parent is preserved
+
  procedure endupdate; - if all "update" finished, fires "onchange" event
 +
procedure clearbuffer; - clears all arrays then fires "onchange"
  
optionsskin:
+
  procedure checkbuffer;
 +
  - [re]loads the arrays with most actual data
 +
  - just a stub here since doesn't have a data source
  
- osc_noskin
+
  function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer/realty/msestring;
- osc_framebuttononly
+
        out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean;
- osc_container
+
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno"
 +
for value "avalue" starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index
 +
if found else next bigger;
  
 +
  function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;
 +
                out aindex: integer;
 +
                const caseinsensitive: boolean;
 +
                const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
 +
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue",
 +
in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index
 +
if found else next bigger;
  
Methods:
+
  function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer;
 +
        out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
 +
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno"
 +
for value "avalue" starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number
 +
if found else next bigger;
  
  // tmsecomponent
+
function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;  out aindex: integer; const caseinsensitive: boolean;
 +
                const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
 +
- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue",
 +
in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number 
 +
if found else next bigger;
  
// (re)draws the widget according to the related skin if apllicable;
+
The external filtering ("filter") procedure takes the arguments of the caller
//
+
togehther with physical row number found in the caller which allows
// also called internally by "loaded" procedure ( before "OnLoaded" code ),
+
to check several values at once for that number, within the filter
// by ShowMessage ( for the internal widgets of the message dialogue ),
+
// when creating tab & form & menu widgets
+
function integervaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
procedure updateskin(const recursive: boolean = false);
+
-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" at row number "aindex"  
 +
             
 +
function integervaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
 +
-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
  
// TRUE if the instance is created but not yet ready
+
function integerindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
// for interaction & accessing data & appearance change & receiving events etc
+
- returns row number of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
// ( the stage between firing "OnCreate" & "OnLoaded" )
 
function loading: boolean;
 
 
{$ifdef FPC}
 
procedure setinline(value: boolean); // ?
 
procedure setancestor(value: boolean); // ?
 
{$endif}
 
  
// TRUE if all conditios are OK for executing the code of "event" ( a handler must be assigned to the event )
+
function integerindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
function canevent(const event: tmethod): boolean;
+
- returns all bunch of indexes of integer array "fiedlno"
  
 +
function integerar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
 +
- returns all bunch of data of integer array "fiedlno"
 +
 
 +
function floatvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
 +
-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" at row number "aindex"
  
// Shortly, replaces the persistent storage of the widget
+
function floatvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
//
+
-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"  
// if {value <> nil} then
 
// - if "instance" is nil then calls "createproc" to create the instance,
 
//    then assigns the instance's value:= "value"
 
// otherwise frees "instance"
 
procedure setoptionalobject(const value: tpersistent; var instance;
 
                        createproc: createprocty);
 
  
// creates the persistent storage of the widget via calling "createproc"
+
function floatindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
procedure getoptionalobject(const instance: tobject; createproc: createprocty);
+
- returns row number of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
  
// obtains & puts to "obj" a CORBA interface entry for "aintf" (GUID,...)
+
function floatindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
function getcorbainterface(const aintf: ptypeinfo; out obj) : boolean;
+
- returns all bunch of indexes of real/datetime array "fiedlno"
  
        // TRUE if the widget is owned, or "self" otherwise
+
function floatar(const fieldno: integer): realarty;
function checkowned(component: tcomponent): boolean;  
+
- returns all bunch of data of real/datetime array "fiedlno" 
  
        // TRUE if the widget is owner, or "self" otherwise
+
function textvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): msestring;
function checkowner(component: tcomponent): boolean;  
+
-  returns value of widestring array "fieldno" at row number "aindex"
  
// return the top-most widget in owner chain starting from this widget
+
function textvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
function rootowner: tcomponent;
+
                      const caseinsensitive: boolean): msestring;
 +
-  returns value of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
  
// return the array of owning widgets starting from this widget
+
function textindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
// componentarty[0] is the widget oneself
+
                      const caseinsensitive: boolean): integer;
function getrootcomponentpath: componentarty;
+
- returns row number of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"
 +
 
 +
function textindexar(const fieldno: integer;
 +
                            const caseinsensitive: boolean): integerarty;
 +
- returns all bunch of indexes of widestring array "fiedlno"
  
        // returns items of objeclinker ( which notify this widget )
+
function textar(const fieldno: integer): msestringarty;
        // and free notify list ( which are notified by this widget ),
+
- returns all bunch of data of widestring array "fiedlno" 
        // duplicates are removed.
 
        //
 
        // Notifies mainly relate to insertion/removal operation on widgets
 
        // The notify list is maintained by FreeNotification & RemoveFreeNotification
 
function linkedobjects: objectarty;
 
  
// sends "event" recursively to child widgets until no more childs or
+
 
// the event is processed ( cea_processed ) by one of the childs,
+
function lookupinteger(const integerkeyfieldno,integerfieldno,
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
+
                                keyvalue: integer): integer; overload;
procedure sendcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
+
- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
+
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( 0 if not found )
  
// sends "event" to each of owning widgets downward from the root owner,
+
function lookupinteger(const stringkeyfieldno,integerfieldno: integer;
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
+
                        const keyvalue: msestring): integer; overload;
procedure sendrootcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
+
- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
+
value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( 0 if not found )
  
// posts an async "atag"-ged event to be handled by oneself
+
function lookuptext(const integerkeyfieldno,textfieldno,
procedure asyncevent(atag: integer = 0);
+
                                keyvalue: integer): msestring; overload;
 +
- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
 +
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( '' if not found )
  
// posts a "tcomponentevent" instance from sender=self,
+
function lookuptext(const stringkeyfieldno,textfieldno: integer;
// "kind" is defined when creating the event,
+
                      const keyvalue: msestring): msestring; overload;
// and "tag" may be adjusted after creation
+
- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
procedure postcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent);
+
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( '' if not found )
  
// returns the classname of the widget if the widget is toplevel,
 
// and "tmsecomponent" otherwise )
 
property moduleclassname: string read getmoduleclassname;
 
  
// returns the classname of the widget as the entry of its constructor
+
function lookupfloat(const integerkeyfieldno,floatfieldno,
// ( button => tbutton, datamodule => tdm1mo, form => ttstfo, dbstringedit => tdbstringedit,.. )
+
                                keyvalue: integer): realty; overload;
property actualclassname: string read getactualclassname;
+
- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
 +
value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
 +
                ( emptyreal if not found )
  
// returns "fmsecomponentstate"
+
function lookupfloat(const stringkeyfieldno,floatfieldno: integer;
// ( a set of cs_ismodule,cs_endreadproc,cs_loadedproc,cs_noload, cs_hasskin,cs_noskin )
+
                                keyvalue: msestring): realty; overload;
property msecomponentstate: msecomponentstatesty read fmsecomponentstate;
 
  
// returns/sets a pointer associated with the widget
+
- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
// ( contrary to the integer "tag", allows to use an arbitary data type
+
value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
// for associating data )
+
                ( emptyreal if not found )
property tagpo: pointer read ftagpo write ftagpo;
+
 
 +
function count: integer; - returns number of data rows
  
// returns/sets a string identifying the widget in the help system
+
property fieldcounttext: integer; -  returns/sets number of widestring arrays
property helpcontext: msestring read gethelpcontext write fhelpcontext;
+
property fieldcountfloat: integer; - returns/sets number of real/datetime arrays
 +
property fieldcountinteger: integer; - returns/sets number of integer arrays
  
// twidget
+
the above "fieldcount*" props clear the buffer on setting a value
  
// creates an instance of the widget, owned by "aowner" if not NIL
+
property integervalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: integer; - a shortcut to "integervaluephys"
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
+
property floatvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: realty; - a shortcut to "floatvaluephys"
 +
property textvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: msestring; - a shortcut to "textvaluephys"
  
destructor destroy; override;
+
property onchange: notifyeventty;  
 +
- called in "changed" wich in turn is called in :
 +
= clearbuffer
 +
= endupdate
 +
= doasyncevent
 +
= loaded
 +
= tlookupbuffer.addrow
  
// ??
+
</pre>
procedure afterconstruction; override;
 
  
// rescales the widget frame ( if assigned ) then owned widgets ( if exist, recursively ) then bounds_* then the font ( if assigned )
+
=== TLookupBuffer ===
// called before inserting in parentwidget,
+
<pre>
// calls "scale(ascale)",
+
tlookupbuffer = class(tcustomlookupbuffer)
// no visual repainting
 
procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); virtual;
 
  
// restores the "fontheight" to "font.glyphheight" if "ow_fontglyphheight" or
+
- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with methods of run-time data filling
// to "font.lineheight" if "ow_fontlineheight" otherwise,
 
// ascale is ignored ?
 
// calls "synctofontheight->setfontheight",
 
// called after inserting in parentwidget,
 
// no visual repainting
 
procedure initnewwidget(const ascale: real); virtual;
 
  
// creates the widget frame if not yet created
+
- see <tcustomlookupbuffer>
procedure createframe;
 
  
// creates the widget face if not yet  created
+
+= Extentions to the public interface:
procedure createface;
 
  
// creates the widget font if not yet  created
+
procedure addrow(const integervalues: array of integer;
procedure createfont;
+
                    const textvalues: array of msestring;
 +
                    const floatvalues: array of realty);
  
// checks ws_loadlock and csdestroing too
+
- adds one row to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays,
function isloading: boolean;
+
array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays
  
// returns "widgetstatety" - a set of (
+
  procedure addrows(const integervalues: array of integerarty;
// ws_visible,ws_enabled,ws_active,ws_entered,ws_entering,ws_exiting,
+
                    const textvalues: array of msestringarty;
// ws_focused,ws_mouseinclient,ws_wantmousebutton,ws_wantmousemove,
+
                    const floatvalues: array of realarty);
// ws_wantmousefocus,ws_iswidget,ws_opaque,ws_nopaint,
 
// ws_clicked,ws_mousecaptured,ws_clientmousecaptured,
 
// ws_loadlock,ws_loadedproc,ws_showproc,ws_minclientsizevalid,
 
// ws_showed,ws_hidden, //used in tcustomeventwidget
 
// ws_destroying,ws_staticframe,ws_staticface,ws_isvisible
 
//
 
// iframe
 
function widgetstate: widgetstatesty;
 
  
// returns "widgetstate1ty" - a set of (
+
- adds many data rows  to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays,  
// (ws1_childscaled,ws1_fontheightlock,
+
only min length of the input data arrays are inserted, longer data are truncated
// ws1_widgetregionvalid,ws1_rootvalid,
+
array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays and the size of "{type}values[i]"
// ws1_anchorsizing,ws1_isstreamed,
+
describes number od data elements in the array
// ws1_scaled, //used in tcustomscalingwidget
 
// ws1_noclipchildren,
 
// ws1_nodesignvisible,ws1_nodesignframe,ws1_nodesignhandles,
 
// ws1_nodesigndelete,ws1_designactive,
 
// ws1_fakevisible,ws1_nominsize //used for report size calculations
 
// )
 
property widgetstate1: widgetstates1ty read fwidgetstate1;
 
 
 
* this set of states is needed because the max FPC set size is 32
+
</pre>
  thus "widgetstate1ty" can't fit all states
 
  
// TRUE if the widget is contained within another widget
+
=== TDBLookupBuffer ===
// ( tcomponent stuff )
+
<pre>
function hasparent: boolean; override;             
+
tdblookupbuffer = class(tcustomdblookupbuffer -> tcustomlookupbuffer)
  
// returns the parent component if it's a widget or the grandparent otherwise
+
- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with interface to fill arrays with DB-data
function getparentcomponent: tcomponent; override;  //tcomponent
+
- see <tcustomlookupbuffer> & <tcustomdblookupbuffer>
  
// TRUE if "awidget" is an ascendant or the widget or they are the same widget
+
Extentions to the public interface:
function checkdescendent(awidget: twidget): boolean;
 
 
// TRUE if app is running and the widget owns the caret or the caret widget
 
function hascaret: boolean;
 
  
        // TRUE if "winid" allocated and not loading and not destroying,
+
  procedure checkbuffer; - if data obsolete ("invalid") then reloads them from "datasource"
        // all widgets on a form have "winid" of this form ( a real window allocated by the OS )
+
 
        // thus have this function TRUE
+
property datasource: tdatasource; - sets/returns DB data source where to load data from
function windowallocated: boolean;
+
property textfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of widestring arrays
 +
property integerfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of integer arrays
 +
property floatfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of real/datetime arrays
  
// TRUE if presents a valid toplevelwindow with assigned "winid"
+
property optionsdb: lbdboptionsty; - tunes some DB behaviour apects
function ownswindow: boolean;
+
- olbdb_closedataset :
 +
= once data obsolete, opens (if needed) the supplier dataset (disabling its bound controls)
 +
then [re]loads data from it then closes it
  
// invalidated area of the widget, the origin is "clientpos" against the roor widget
+
- olbdb_invalidateifmodified :
function updaterect: rectty;
+
= gets marked "invalid" once contents of the bound dataset change,  
 +
it signals to reload the buffer with the new data just before next accessing
 +
( for any purpose - searching, lookuping, getting value/(array of values),..)
  
// calls recursively "canclose" for all contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded! ),
+
</pre>
// TRUE if none of the widgets return FALSE
 
//
 
// more specialized widgets may have "canclose" overridden
 
// to perform more work than just this call recursion
 
// ( not null or range check,.. )
 
//
 
// "onclosequery" must also pass the check if assigned, for the function to succeed
 
function canclose(const newfocus: twidget = nil): boolean; virtual;
 
  
        // checks "canclose" first for focused widget of the window ( form,.. )
+
=== TDBmemoLookupbuffer ===
        // if it is a descendant of the widget or the widget oneself,
+
<pre>
        // then continues with subwidgets of the widget;
+
- allows to use  for lookup-ing any text-convertable DB-fields
        // also - finishes editing ( snapshots "value" ) in the focused widget before checking
+
- an analog of tdblookupbuffer, but :
function canparentclose(const newfocus: twidget): boolean; overload;
+
- "integerfields" may be names of any integer-convertable DB-fields
 +
- "floatfields" may be names of any (real/datetime)-convertable DB-fields
 +
- "textfields"  may be names of any text-presentable DB-fields
  
// the above function but with the preserved focus
+
- each DB-field value ( presenting a memo generally of many lines ) may supply many data rows at once
function canparentclose: boolean; overload;
+
to the bound array of the buffer, since this value will be internally splitted & turned into native array values,
                  //newfocus = window.focusedwidget     
+
and the resulting "count" (arrays row count) of the whole buffer will be the minimal rows count amongst arrays
 +
of the buffer, the rest data are truncated
  
function canfocus: boolean; virtual;
+
- when loading widestring arrays, also checks for & performs "utf8-to-widestring" conversion of values of
function setfocus(aactivate: boolean = true): boolean; virtual;//true if ok
+
the bound DB-fields so that these arrays always store widestrings
procedure nextfocus; //sets inputfocus to then next appropriate widget
+
</pre>
  
function findtabfocus(const ataborder: integer): twidget;
+
=== TThreadComp ===
                      //nil if can not focus
+
=== TStatFile ===
 
+
<pre>
function firsttabfocus: twidget;
+
- so that to be in effect, it should also be assigned to the form where the widget using the stafile is placed on
function lasttabfocus: twidget;
+
- in design, if "onstatwrite" is set and "filedir" is not yet created, deactivate exception "ECreateError" in project settings ( "Debugger" tab )
function nexttaborder(const down: boolean = false): twidget;
+
- "filedir" may contain "~/" indicating the user's home directory
 +
- options "oe_savestate" & "oe_savevalue" of "client" widgets define what to store to the file
 +
- position etc changes or/and value changes
 +
- in case when a main form shares its stafile with non-main forms, on creating non-main ones, just edited not saved data of the main form ( bound to vars of the statfile) are reset to values read from the statfile upon creating the form; for "sfo_memory", this effect absents unless widgets on the concurring forms share same variable[s]; to avoid this behaviour, disable "fo_autoreadstat" & "fo_autowritestat" of the non-main forms
 +
- each "tstafile" owns:
 +
= tstatwriter:
 +
* provides methods of writing sections & statvars to a memory/file stream
 +
- tstatreader:
 +
* holds list of sections with statvars each
 +
* provides search & check & reading interface to the statvars
 +
* provides reading statvars from a memory/file stream
 +
 
 +
Positioning to a section speeds up accessing its statvars
  
function focusback(const aactivate: boolean = true): boolean;
+
- there also is "tstatfiler" ( exposed by some "tstatfile" events ) which:
                              //false if focus not changed
+
= may present or "tstatwriter" or "tstatreader" ( there's a check method )
 +
= provides directionless "update" methods with internal switch to needed direction of processing
 +
- "reading" or "writing" statvars on per-section basis
  
function parentcolor: colorty;
 
function actualcolor: colorty; virtual;
 
function actualopaquecolor: colorty;
 
function backgroundcolor: colorty;
 
function translatecolor(const acolor: colorty): colorty;
 
  
procedure widgetevent(const event: twidgetevent); virtual;
+
activator :
 +
<see tactivator> : NOT YET DONE
  
procedure sendwidgetevent(const event: twidgetevent);
+
encoding = "en_utf8" selected here, allows to store non-Latin text in the file
                              //event will be destroyed
+
      filedir = directory where to keep the file ( by default - the current working directory )
 +
filename = name of the file
  
procedure release; override;
+
options:
 +
sfo_memory = reads & writes not from a disk file but from a named memory stream
 +
( there's an exclusion - see below "sfo_savedata" ),
 +
mostly useful for presenting last used values on recalling
 +
non-main forms etc ( data even survive recreating forms),
 +
or even for data "exchange" between non-main modal( non-concurring ) forms
 +
in case of the target widgets share same statvarnames
  
function show(const modal: boolean = false;
+
sfo_createpath = creates "filedir" if necessary
            const transientfor: twindow = nil): modalresultty; virtual;
+
sfo_savedata = used only with "sfo_memory", commands to save
 +
the memory data to the master statfile (see below)
  
procedure hide;
+
sfo_activatorread = activator activate triggers reading ???
procedure activate(const abringtofront: boolean = true); virtual;
+
sfo_activatorwrite = activator deactivate triggers writing ???
                            //show and setfocus
 
  
procedure bringtofront;
+
statfile = a master statfile
procedure sendtoback;
+
statvarname = name of section of this file in the upper statfile
procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twidget);
+
Tag = an integer property for misc purposes
  
procedure paint(const canvas: tcanvas); virtual;
+
Event handlers:
procedure update; virtual;
+
onstatafterread - fires on return from "readstat"
procedure scrollwidgets(const dist: pointty);
+
onstatafterwrite - fires on return from "writestat"
 +
onstatbeforeread - fires on beginning of "readstat"
 +
onstatbeforewrite - fires on beginning of "writestat"
 +
onstatread = fires after reading state data
 +
onstatwrite = fires after writing state data
 +
onstatupdate = fires after reading/writing state data just before
 +
"onstatread" & "onstatwrite"
  
procedure scrollrect(const dist: pointty; const rect: rectty; scrollcaret: boolean);
+
Public methods:
                            //origin = paintrect.pos
 
  
procedure scroll(const dist: pointty);
+
  procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); override;
                            //scrolls paintrect and widgets
+
  - does nothing but fixes the default file name as the statfile default
 +
 
 +
  procedure readstat(stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
 +
  - rereads all statvars of the stafile/memorystream
 +
 
 +
  procedure readstat(const aname: msestring; const statreader: tstatreader); overload;
 +
  - rereads "aname" statvar of the statfile
  
procedure getcaret;
+
  procedure writestat(const stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
procedure scrollcaret(const dist: pointty);
+
  - rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
function mousecaptured: boolean;
+
  (if neccessary, prepares to writting - creates "filedir", stafile,...)
procedure capturemouse(grab: boolean = true);
+
 
procedure releasemouse;
+
  procedure writestat(const aname: msestring; const statwriter: tstatwriter); overload;
procedure capturekeyboard;
+
  - overwrites "aname" statvar of the statfile
procedure releasekeyboard;
+
 
procedure synctofontheight; virtual;
+
  procedure updatestat(const aname: msestring; const statfiler: tstatfiler);
 +
  - depending on kind of "statfiler" ( writer/reader ), writes/reads
 +
    the most up-to-date stat data
 +
</pre>
  
procedure dragevent(var info: draginfoty); virtual;
+
=== TTimer ===
procedure dochildscaled(const sender: twidget); virtual;
+
=== TNoGuiAction ===
 
+
=== TPipeReadercomp ===
procedure invalidatewidget;    //invalidates whole widget
+
=== TSysEnvManager ===
procedure invalidate;          //invalidates clientrect
+
=== TProcessMonitor ===
procedure invalidaterect(const rect: rectty; org: originty = org_client);
+
=== TFilechangeNotifier ===
procedure invalidateframestate;
+
=== TShortCutController ===
 +
=== TPostscriptPrinter ===
 +
=== TGdiPrinter ===
 +
=== TWmfPrinter ===
 +
=== TSkinController ===
 +
=== TGuiThreadComp ===
  
procedure invalidateframestaterect(const rect: rectty;
+
== Font ==
                                        const org: originty = org_client); 
+
See also : [[Reference:_MSEgui/TFont]]
function hasoverlappingsiblings(arect: rectty): boolean; //origin = pos
 
  
function window: twindow;
+
=== Any Font ===
function rootwidget: twidget;
+
<pre>
 
+
    charset { ANSI/ DEFAULT/ SYMBOL /SHIFTJIS /HANGEUL /GB2312 /CHINESEBIG5 /OEM
function parentofcontainer: twidget;
+
/JOHAB / HEBREW/ ARABIC/ GREEK/ TURKISH/ VIETNAMESE/ THAI/ EASTEUROPE/
            //parentwidget.parentwidget if parentwidget has not ws_iswidget,
+
RUSSIAN/ MAC/ BALTIC }
            //parentwidget otherwise
+
- changes the font to the nearest containing the selected encoding(charset)
 
+
- no font change made if the supplied encoding doesn't match any font
property parentwidget: twidget read fparentwidget write setparentwidget;
+
color
function getrootwidgetpath: widgetarty; //root widget is last
+
- color of the glyphs contours
 
+
colorbackground
// number of contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded ! )
+
- fill color of the glyph cells ( not including extraspace )
function widgetcount: integer;
+
colorshadow
 
+
- color of SE glyph "edges" ( if not "cl_none", deactivates "colorbackground" )
function parentwidgetindex: integer; //index in parentwidget.widgets, -1 if none
+
extraspace
property widgets[const index: integer]: twidget read getwidgets;
+
- v-space between glyph cells of adjacent text rows (negative values cause the cells to overlap )
function widgetatpos(var info: widgetatposinfoty): twidget; overload;
+
height
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty): twidget; overload;
+
- v-size of glyph cells, in pixels
 
+
name
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty;
+
- initially, font is choosen by { "family" = this name }
                  const state: widgetstatesty): twidget; overload;
+
options:
 
+
foo_fixed
property taborderedwidgets: widgetarty read gettaborderedwidgets;
+
- changes the font to the nearest "mono" spaced (usually = Courier)
 
+
foo_proportional
function findtagwidget(const atag: integer; const aclass: widgetclassty): twidget;
+
- changes the font to the nearest "proportionally" spaced (usually = Helvetica)
              //returns first matching descendent
+
foo_helvetica
 
+
- changes the font to the nearest in "sans" category (usually = Helvetica)
property container: twidget read getcontainer;
+
foo_roman
function containeroffset: pointty;
+
- changes the font to the nearest in "serif" category (usually = Times[ New Roman])
function childrencount: integer; virtual;
+
foo_script
property children[const index: integer]: twidget read getchildwidgets; default;
+
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "script" category
 +
foo_decorative
 +
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "decorative" category
 +
foo_antialiased
 +
- Linux-only, enables antialiasing (if disabled by Xft globally)
 +
foo_nonantialiased
 +
- Linux-only, disables antialiasing (if enabled by Xft globally)
 +
usually making glyph extents (not cells !) a bit wider
 +
style:
 +
fs_bold
 +
- gives the font a "bold" look
 +
fs_italic
 +
- gives the font an "italic" look
 +
fs_underline
 +
- gives the font an "underlined" look
 +
fs_strikeout
 +
- gives the font a "striked out" look
 +
fs_selected
 +
- "TRUE" here combined with {tf_noselect:=FALSE}, causes the text described by this font
 +
to be initially selected ( with the clipboard operations available ),
 +
currently applicable only to richstrings
  
function childatpos(const pos: pointty;
+
width
                  const clientorigin: boolean = true): twidget; virtual;
+
- 10*{ glyph cell width, average in pixels }, 0 = {font default}
  
function getsortxchildren: widgetarty;
+
xscale
function getsortychildren: widgetarty;
+
- width ratio of each glyph {cell & contour}, the effect is similar to "width"
property focusedchild: twidget read ffocusedchild;
 
property focusedchildbefore: twidget read ffocusedchildbefore;
 
  
function mouseeventwidget(const info: mouseeventinfoty): twidget;
+
*** "foo_*" font selection overrides one made with "name"
  
function checkdescendent(widget: twidget): boolean;
+
*** if change with "foo_*" is unsuccessful then the nearest "sans" font is usually chosen
                    //true if widget is descendent or self
 
  
function checkancestor(widget: twidget): boolean;
+
*** The categories :
                    //true if widget is ancestor or self
 
  
function containswidget(awidget: twidget): boolean;
+
sans => have no serifs and have strokes of even thickness
 +
serif => have serifs at glyph contours and made up of strokes of varying thickness
 +
script => resemble handwriting
 +
decorative => flashy styles to be used sparingly in headlines or posters
  
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget); overload;
+
</pre>
  
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget; const apos: pointty); overload; virtual;
+
== GUI ==
                //widget can be child
+
=== TWindow ===
 +
<pre>
 +
twindow = class(teventobject,icanvas)
 +
  public
  
function iswidgetclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty; const caption: boolean = false): boolean;
+
// releases mouse, unlinks from the canvas, processes all pending events of the window
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
+
// if called from within main thread then destroys the window directly
//or in frame.caption if caption = true, origin = pos
+
// otherwise posts a window destroy event for oneself and waits for it to be processed
 +
procedure destroywindow;
  
function isclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
// registers the instance of onself in the "owner" widget, allocates the canvas,
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
+
// adds a reference to oneself,
 +
// then prepares the "owner" hierarchy to be invalidated ( "owner.rootchanged" )
 +
// since now, the window is allocated and belongs to the "aowner" widget
 +
constructor create(aowner: twidget);
  
 +
destructor destroy; override;
  
function isdblclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
// adds "method" to the internal list of scroll dependants
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
+
procedure registeronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
// and timedlay to last buttonpress is short
 
  
function isdblclicked(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
// removes "method" from the internal list of scroll dependants
//true if eventtype in [et_buttonpress,et_butonrelease], button is mb_left,
+
procedure unregisteronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
// and timedlay to last same buttonevent is short
 
  
function isleftbuttondown(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
+
// releases mouse if captured, resets the cursor, then enters an event loop for the window,
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
+
// TRUE on return if the window is destroyed
//origin = paintrect.pos
+
function beginmodal: boolean;
 +
 +
  * checks if the "sender" window is already modal to avoid circularity,  
 +
    if not then starts an event loop  for the "sender" where the "sender" is a receiver of GUI events,
 +
      once the loop is terminated reactivates the previously active window if it was,
 +
    TRUE if modalwindow destroyed 
  
//======================
+
  function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
  
widgetrect: the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption
+
// removes the internal stuff which indicates the modal state
 +
procedure endmodal;
  
paintrect: the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption
+
// if the window is visible,
 +
// deactivates the previously active window, shows the window (see below),
 +
// if no active window in the app or the window or its Z-predecessor is modal and
 +
// the app has no focused widget then prepares the bound widget to be focused,
 +
// then addresses the WM to put the window to foreground
 +
procedure activate;
  
clientrect: virtual area which
+
  // if the bound widget has visible=true then:
- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
+
  //  - if NOT windowevent then :
- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect",
+
  //    = address the WM to set size of the window acc to window opts
  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
+
  //      wp_maximized, wp_fullscreen or normal size otherwise
 +
  // = if the window is normally sized, moves it to its default position is specified ( screen centered etc )
 +
  // - unhides/unminimizes the window if needed
 +
  // - shows other windows of the applications acc to state of the window group
 +
  // ( in normal size or minimized )
  
//======================
+
  private
 +
procedure twindow.show(windowevent: boolean);
  
 +
// TRUE if this window currently grabs user input
 +
( a widget drawn within the window(=form) is in focus,.. )
 +
function active: boolean;
  
 +
// if the window was active then deactivates the window  & remembers it as the previous active ( to restore leater if requested ),
 +
// returns TRUE if that storage occurred
 +
function deactivateintermediate: boolean;
  
// the coord of outer top-left corner against the toplevel form = the window owner,
+
// makes the window active & clears the above app reference to it ( "active before deactivating" )
// including the frame & frame caption
+
procedure reactivate; //clears app.finactivewindow
function rootpos: pointty;
 
  
// the coord of the outer top-left corner against the screen ( the WM decorations aren't counted in )
+
// scans the app event queue for "ek_expose" event[s] addressed to the window,
// includes the frame & frame caption
+
// if found then redraws that part of the window which the event describes
property screenpos: pointty;  
+
// ( processed events are then deleted )
 +
procedure update;
  
// the coord of the outer top-left corner against the parent widget,
+
// TRUE if the window :
// including the frame & frame caption
+
// 1) doesn't have an inner widget grabbing input focus
property widgetrect: rectty;
+
// or
property pos: pointty; // =widgetrect.pos
+
// 2) has such widget, and this widget ( and all its descendants )
property size: sizety; // =widgetrect.size
+
//   pass "CanClose" check
property left: integer; // =bounds_x
+
//
property right: integer; //widgetrect.x + widgetrect.cx, sets cx;
+
// *** see also "twidget.CanClose" ***
property top: integer;  // =bounds_y
+
//
property bottom: integer; //widgetrect.y + widgetrect.cy, sets cy;
+
function candefocus: boolean;
property width: integer; // =bounds_cx
 
property height: integer; // =bounds_cy
 
function widgetsizerect: rectty;         //pos = nullpoint
 
  
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
+
// tries to defocus the currently focused widget if it belongs to the window,
    // except the frame & frame caption
+
// if succeeds then executes code of virtual "DoDefocus" of the widget descessor
function paintrect: rectty;
+
// ( this code defines behaviour & look of the widget on defocusing );
function paintpos: pointty;
+
//
function paintsize: sizety;
+
// no defocusing is done if the focused widget ( or its descendants )
function innerpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
+
// doesn't pass "CanClose" check
function clientwidgetrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
+
//
function clientwidgetpos: pointty;
+
procedure nofocus;
function clippedpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to  but clipped by all parentpaintrects
+
 
function innerwidgetrect: rectty;     // mainly equals to paintrect
+
  // setfocusedwidget(widget)
function innerclientwidgetpos: pointty;
+
 
 
+
  property focuscount: cardinal read ffocuscount;
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
+
  function close: boolean; //true if ok
    // except the frame caption
+
  procedure beginmoving; //lock window rect modification
function framerect: rectty; // =paintrect except the frame caption area
+
  procedure endmoving;
function framepos: pointty;
+
  procedure bringtofront;
function framesize: sizety;
+
  procedure sendtoback;
 +
  procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twindow);
 +
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means top
 +
  procedure stackover(const predecessor: twindow);
 +
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means bottom
 +
  function stackedunder: twindow; //nil if top
 +
  function stackedover: twindow; //nil if bottom
 +
  function hastransientfor: boolean;
  
    // the coord of the client area ( clientrect )  against the paint area ( paintrect )
+
  procedure capturemouse;
    //  usually these areas match
+
  procedure releasemouse;
function clientrect: rectty;
+
  procedure postkeyevent(const akey: keyty;  
property clientsize: sizety;
+
        const ashiftstate: shiftstatesty = []; const release: boolean = false;
property clientwidth: integer;
+
                  const achars: msestring = '');
property clientheight: integer;
 
property clientpos: pointty;
 
  
    // the coord of the paint area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
+
  function winid: winidty;
function paintrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
+
  function haswinid: boolean;
 
+
  function state: windowstatesty;
    // the coord of the client area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
+
  function visible: boolean;
function clientrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
+
  function activating: boolean; //in internalactivate proc
 +
  function normalwindowrect: rectty;
 +
  property updateregion: regionty read fupdateregion;
 +
  function updaterect: rectty;
  
// the coord of the inner area against the client area ( clientrect )
+
  procedure registermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
function innerclientrect: rectty; // mainly equals to clientrect
+
  procedure unregistermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
function innerclientsize: sizety;
 
function innerclientpos: pointty;
 
  
function framewidth: sizety;             //widgetrect.size - paintrect.size
+
  property options: windowoptionsty read foptions;
function clientframewidth: sizety;        //widgetrect.size - clientrect.size
 
function innerclientframewidth: sizety;  //widgetrect.size - innerclientrect.size
 
function innerframewidth: sizety;        //clientrect.size - innerclientrect.size 
 
  
    // the coord of the paint area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
+
// widget
function paintparentpos: pointty;   //origin = parentwidget.pos
+
property owner: twidget read fowner;
  
    // the coord of the client area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
+
  property focusedwidget: twidget read ffocusedwidget;
function clientparentpos: pointty;   //origin = parentwidget.pos
+
  property transientfor: twindow read ftransientfor;
 +
  property modalresult: modalresultty read fmodalresult write setmodalresult;
 +
  property buttonendmodal: boolean read getbuttonendmodal write setbuttonendmodal;
 +
  property globalshortcuts: boolean read getglobalshortcuts write setglobalshortcuts;
 +
  property localshortcuts: boolean read getlocalshortcuts write setlocalshortcuts;
 +
  property windowpos: windowposty read getwindowpos write setwindowpos;
 +
  property caption: msestring read fcaption write setcaption;
  
    // the coord of the widgetrect(pos) against the client area of parent
 
property parentclientpos: pointty;
 
  
 +
windowoptionty = (wo_popup,wo_message,wo_buttonendmodal,wo_groupleader,
 +
                  wo_windowcentermessage); //showmessage centered in window
  
function clientpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 
function widgetpostoclientpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 
function widgetpostopaintpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 
function paintpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 
procedure scale(const ascale: real); virtual;
 
  
 +
optionswindow:
 +
wo_popup
 +
- in run-time, hides all OS windows-manager ( WM ) decorations (title bar, buttons "Close/Resize,Min/Max" etc),
 +
letting only its client area to appear
 +
so :
 +
= the window should have own facilities to replace the deactivated WM functionality if needed
 +
= can't be resized/maximize/minimized/moved
 +
wo_message
 +
- similar to "wo_popup" but allows WM to close ( with "Close" button ) & move the window
 +
 +
wo_groupleader
 +
- keeps on the WM taskbar a shortcut to the window
 +
( if the parent window is a groupleader too then displays a step upper in its group )
  
property minsize: sizety read fminsize write setminsize;
+
Event handlers:
property maxsize: sizety read fmaxsize write setmaxsize;
 
function maxclientsize: sizety; virtual;
 
  
 +
- onmove
 +
= fires once the (window/widget) is created/moved ( with check if really moved by a distance)
  
property anchors: anchorsty read fanchors write setanchors default defaultanchors;
+
</pre>
property defaultfocuschild: twidget read getdefaultfocuschild write setdefaultfocuschild;
 
  
 +
=== TFormScrollbox ===
 +
<pre>
 +
- presents client area of form & parent of its widgets,
 +
initially stretched to fit the form & bound with anchoring
 +
but may be adjusted with "bounds" & "anchors"
 +
 
 +
    Properties:
 +
               
 +
anchors
 +
bounds
 +
 +
color
 +
- color of the whole container area ( except its frame ) & form widgets
 +
if their color is "cl_parent"
  
procedure changeclientsize(const delta: sizety); //asynchronous
+
name = container
  
function getcanvas(aorigin: originty = org_client): tcanvas;
+
cursor, enabled, face, frame, helpcontext, hint, optionswidget, popupmenu,
 +
taborder, tag, visible, onactivate, onafterpaint, onbeforepaint,
 +
onchildmouseevent, onclientmouseevent, ondeativate, ondefocus, onenter,
 +
onexit, onfocus, onfontheightdelta, onmouseevent, onpaint, onpopup
 +
onresize, onshowhint
 +
- the same meaning as for the served form
  
function showing: boolean;
 
              //true if self and all ancestors visible and window allocated
 
  
function isenabled: boolean;
+
oncalcminscrollsize
              //true if self and all ancestors enabled
+
onscroll
 +
onchildscaled
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
=== TFaceList ===
 +
=== TFrameComp ===
 +
 
 +
See also here: [[Reference:_MSEgui/TFrame]].
  
function active: boolean;
+
function entered: boolean;
+
<pre>
 +
Terminology :
  
function activeentered: boolean;
+
{client area = area of the widget which interacts with a user}
//true if entered and window is regularactivewindow or inactivated
 
  
function focused: boolean;
+
{bevelling = additional facets rising/sinking frame & client area,
function clicked: boolean;
+
constists of two parts -
 +
- external: between frame and widget
 +
- internal: between frame and client area
 +
}
  
function indexofwidget(const awidget: twidget): integer;
+
{frame= flat space between external & internal facets,
 +
floats at the inner level of the external facet
 +
}
  
procedure changedirection(const avalue: graphicdirectionty;
+
*** Both frame & bevelling affect the client area ***
                                            var dest: graphicdirectionty); virtual;
 
  
// (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally within the parent's client area
+
--------------------------
// so that awidget[i] were placed next each other
+
template:
// at h-space dist[i], starting from "startx" with the right margin "endmargin";
 
//
 
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining h-spaces are taken
 
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
 
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
 
//
 
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to h-resize to provide the margin :
 
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_left,an_right] set then the first of such is resized
 
//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is h-resized
 
//
 
procedure placexorder(
 
const startx: integer;
 
const dist: array of integer;
 
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 
  
// (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area  
+
colorclient = color of the client area
// so that awidget[i] were placed upper/lower each other
 
// at v-space dist[i], starting from "starty" with the bottom margin "endmargin";
 
//
 
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining v-spaces are taken
 
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
 
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
 
//
 
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to v-resize to provide the margin :
 
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_top,an_bottom] set then the first of such is resized
 
//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is v-resized
 
//
 
procedure placeyorder(
 
const starty: integer;
 
const dist: array of integer;
 
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 
              //origin = clientpos, endmargin by size adjust of widgets
 
              //with [an_top,an_bottom], minint -> no change
 
  
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally  within the parent's client area so that
+
colorframe = color of the frame
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
+
colorframeactive = used instead of colorframe if the widget is
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_left" set ) so that they right borders match the right border of awidgets[0]
+
active; "cl_default" means same as colorframe.
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_right" set ) so that they left borders match the left border of awidgets[0]
 
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they Y-axes match the Y-axe of awidgets[0]
 
//
 
// mainly applicable for v-stacked widgets since h-stacked may overlap after such alignment
 
//
 
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
 
function alignx(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 
  
 +
works if (leveli/levelo <> 0 that's the facets exist :
  
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area so that
+
colorshadow = color of facets screened from the NW light source
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
+
colordkshadow = color of shadows dropped by the NW light source
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_top" set ) so that they bottom borders match the bottom border of awidgets[0]
+
                colordkwidth = width of the shadows in pixel, -1=default
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_bottom" set ) so that they top borders match the top border of awidgets[0]
 
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they X-axes match the X-axe of awidgets[0]
 
//
 
// mainly applicable for h-stacked widgets since v-stacked may overlap after such alignment
 
//
 
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
 
function aligny(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 
  
function actualcursor: cursorshapety; virtual;
+
colorlight = color of facets exposed to the NW light source
 +
colorhighlight = color of brighter edges of the facets
 +
                colorhlwidth = width of the brighter edges in pixel, -1=default
  
 +
        extraspace = if applied to menu items, adds more space between these items
  
Event handlers:
+
framei_:
 +
(for extendable widgets like menus, these settings widen the widget,
 +
for non-extendable like buttons - they squeeze the text area )
  
- onactivate
+
bottom= lower margin of text to the client area
 +
left = left margin of text to the client area
 +
right = margin of text to the client area
 +
top = upper margin of text to the client area
  
fires :
+
framewidth= width of the frame
 +
leveli = {width=height} of the internal facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
 +
levelo = {width=height} of the external facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
  
= on receiving input focus, just before "OnFocus"
+
<any frame>
 
= forms specific :
 
* on 1-st display of the form after "OnLoaded" ( from "Loaded" procedure)
 
* on switch back from another apllication/WM ( "oe_activate" event )
 
* after closure of a descendant form
 
* on minimizing/maximizing the form
 
  
- onchildscaled
+
*** extends & customizes "tframecomp" ***
  
fires :
+
template
 +
- "tframecomp" supplying the initial settings
  
= on child(s) resizing due to font height change
+
colorclient,colordkshadow,colordkwidth,colorframe,colorframeactive,
 +
colorhighlight,colorhlwidth,colorlight,colorshadow,framewidth,
 +
leveli, levelo, framei_*,
  
= form widget: once "form.container" {scrolling widget} is loaded
+
<see "tframecomp">
  
- ondeactivate
+
font
fires
+
<see "tfont">
= form widget: when the form looses input focus
 
= non-form widget: when the widget looses input focus
 
  
- ondefocus
+
caption
 +
- some descriptive text( function name, user prompt,...) placed
 +
in a N/W/S/E-combination to the widget's client area
  
fires
+
***
= on disabling the widget
+
non-empty caption if (captionpos <> cp_center) & (captiondistouter=false & captiondist>0) enlarges the framed widget  
 +
by the corresponding size of caption
  
*mse = form widget: if another form is focused
+
***
= non-form widget: if another widget is focused
 
  
- onenter
+
captiondist - margin between the caption & the client area
= fires on any way of taking parent-wide focus as soon as
 
the parent stores the new child's order, before "OnActivate" & "OnFocus"
 
  
- onexit
+
captiondistouter :
= fires last on parent-wide lossing focus, after "OnDefocus" & "OnDeactivate"
 
= for top-level ( not in a container ) forms, doesn't fire
 
  
- onfocus
+
- if "false"(by default), the distance is measured between
fires
+
the inner (facing the client area) extent of the caption
= once the existing widget takes the focus
+
and the client area outward the area,
= on showing the widget's form if the widget has the lowest "TabOrder"
+
the caption is placed outside of the client area
  
- onfontheightdelta
+
- if "true", the caption is mirrored against the edge of client area as
fires
+
to the position when "false"
= if [ow_fontglyphheight OR ow_fontlineheight ] AND {the
 
new font height differs from the previos one}
 
= before the parent redraws this widget
 
  
- onpopup
+
*** nagative values of "captiondist" visually inverse "out of" and within ***
fires :
 
= on calling a popup-menu ( with "RightClick" ), once the menu items of the current level are loaded
 
( before building the submenus )
 
  
- onresize
+
      captionnoclip - do not clip frame and client area for caption background
 +
( the client area preserves own background under the caption text)
  
= fires on creating/(changing size)/(min-max restoring) of widget,
+
captionnooffset - shift orthogonal to "captiondist"
before actual redrawing
 
  
= rechecks if there's real work to do
+
captionpos - "corner" where to place the caption
  
- onshowhint
+
localprops :
= fires when a installed hint is activated or on "aplication.showint" called
 
= since called last, allows to adjust the default behavior
 
  
- onbeforeupdateskin
+
frl_levelo - "levelo" overrides "template.levelo"
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) before applying the skin
+
frl_leveli - "leveli" overrides "template.leveli"
 +
frl_framewidth - "framewidth" overrides "template.framewidth"
 +
frl_colorclient - "colorclient" overrides "template.colorclient"
 +
frl_colorframe - "colorframe" overrides "template.colorframe"
 +
frl_colorframeactive - "colorframeactive" overrides "template.colorframeactive"
 +
frl_colordkshadow - "colordkshadow" overrides "template.colordkshadow"
 +
frl_colorshadow - "colorshadow" overrides "template.colorshadow"
 +
frl_colorlight - "colorlight" overrides "template.colorlight"
 +
frl_colorhighlight - "colorhighlight" overrides "template.colorhighlight"
 +
frl_colordkwidth - "colordkwidth" overrides "template.colordkwidth"
 +
frl_colorhlwidth - "colorhlwidth" overrides "template.colorhlwidth"
 +
frl_fileft - "framei_left" overrides "template.framei_left"
 +
frl_firight - "framei_right" overrides "template.framei_right"
 +
frl_fitop - "framei_top" overrides "template.framei_top"
 +
frl_fibottom - "framei_bottom" overrides "template.framei_bottom"
  
- onafterupdateskin
+
frl_nodisable
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) once the skin is applied
+
</pre>
 +
 
 +
=== TFaceComp ===
  
<pre/>
+
See also here: https://wiki.freepascal.org/Reference:_MSEgui/TFace
  
== NoGui ==
 
=== TAction ===
 
 
<pre>
 
<pre>
Shortcut processing order :
+
- doesn't affect the widget frame but client area of the frame
  
- the smallest piece of processing is "doshortcut" procedure which
 
is called until processed:
 
= starting from the sender up to the toplevel widget
 
= then by all child widgets with non-set "ow_noparentshortcut"
 
= then, if "ow_nochildshortcut" isn't set, by the parent widget
 
= then by the widget oneself
 
 
- "doshortcut" is checked in the following order:
 
= starting from form's main menu
 
= then from the owning window ( the widget oneself )
 
= then from the application
 
  
 +
template:
 +
fade:
 +
color[i]: = colors forming the fade
 +
direction: = direction where the fade grows to
 +
gd_(right/up/left/down)
  
*** A shortcut is bound to a widget by :
+
pos[i]: = relational position of color[i] on the direction (0.0..1.0) extent
- placing an action component on the widget ***
 
- direct assigning the shortcut to the widget (menus,..)  
 
---------------------------
 
  
caption, color, colorglyph, helpcontext, hint, imagecheckedoffset,
+
transparency = makes the face half-transparent and enlighten the underlying widget 
imagelist <see "timagelist">, imagenr, imagenrdisabled
+
with a light source of the selected color  
 +
( in this case, colors of the face & the widget & the light source
 +
simply summarize to higher brightness )
  
- sets look of "clients" (buttons, menu/toolbar items,..), unless
+
image:
these clients have "state.as_local*" set :
+
see <any image>
  
*** For meaning of these options, see help on the "client" widgets ***
+
options:
  
group
+
        *** The fade colors are used not as colors but RGB alpha values ($00 -> opaque, $ff -> transparent)
- default value for one-named property of the bound widgets
+
if fao_alpha* are set *** :
( menu items,... )
 
  
options :
+
fao_alphafadeall = applies blending to the widget & all its children
ao_updateonidle
+
fao_alphafadenochildren = preserves child widgets from blending
- runs this action in cycle, waiting for no gui events everytime
+
                fao_alphafadeimage = applies blending to "face.image"
  
ao_globalshortcut
 
- allows the action to trigger on a non-main form
 
  (the shortcut is triggered whatever form of the applicatin it was pressed on,
 
  otherwise only when the form where the aption is placed on is focused )
 
  
ao_nocandefocus
+
<any face>
- causes the action not to call "CanDefocus" for focused edit widget of active form
 
  before executing own code
 
  ( it helps to avoid the effect of cancelling changes in these widgets
 
  on activating the bound shortcut )
 
  
shortcut
+
*** extends & customizes "tfacecomp" ***
- keyboard combination triggering the action
 
  
shortcut
+
fade, image, option
- alternative "shortcut" and handled identically
+
- see "tfacecomp"
 
+
state :
+
template
 +
- "tfacecomp" supplying the initial settings
 +
 
 +
localprops :
 +
fal_options - "options" overrides "template.options"
 +
fal_fadirection - "fade.direction" overrides "template.fade.direction"
 +
fal_image - "image" overrides "template.image"
 +
fal_fapos - "fade.pos[i]" overrides "template.fade.pos[i]"
 +
fal_facolor - "fade.color[i]" overrides "template.fade.color[i]"
 +
fal_fatransparency - "fade.transparency" overrides "template.fade.transparency"
 +
</pre>
  
as_disabled
+
=== TBitmapComp ===
- prevents the action from triggering, also puts the bound widgets to "disabled" look
+
=== TScalingwidget ===
 +
<pre>
 +
  optionsscale :
 +
autosizing to provide room for :
 +
= {"frame.caption" + "offset_*"}
 +
= "offset_*" if "frame.caption" is unset and "osc_shrink*" is set
 +
 +
= osc_expandx
 +
- makes the widget wider to fit the caption if needed
  
as_invisible
+
= osc_shrinkx
- in run-time, hides the bound widget, still reacting on the shortcut or direct call
+
- makes the widget narrower to have no space left & right to the "frame.caption"
  
as_checked
+
= osc_expandy
- selects the bound menu item if it has "mao_checkbox" option set
+
- makes the widget taller to fit the caption if needed
  
as_default
+
= osc_shrinky
as_local*
+
- makes the widget lower to have no space up & down to the "frame.caption"
  
statfile
+
= osc_invisishrinkx
<see "tstatfile">
+
- fully h-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
  
stavarname
+
= osc_invisishrinky
 +
- fully v-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
  
+
</pre>
tagaction
 
onasyncevent
 
onchange
 
onexecute
 
onupdate
 
<pre/>
 
  
=== TActivator ===
+
=== TImageList ===
=== TThreadComp ===
+
=== TPopupMenu ===
=== TStatFile ===
+
=== TMainMenu ===
- so that to be in effect, it should also be assigned to the form where the widget using the stafile is placed on
 
- in design, if "onstatwrite" is set and "filedir" is not yet created, deactivate exception "ECreateError" in project settings ( "Debugger" tab )
 
- "filedir" may contain "~/" indicating the user's home directory
 
- options "oe_savestate" & "oe_savevalue" of "client" widgets define what to store to the file
 
- position etc changes or/and value changes
 
- in case when a main form shares its stafile with non-main forms, on creating non-main ones, just edited not saved data of the main form ( bound to vars of the statfile) are reset to values read from the statfile upon creating the form; for "sfo_memory", this effect absents unless widgets on the concurring forms share same variable[s]; to avoid this behaviour, disable "fo_autoreadstat" & "fo_autowritestat" of the non-main forms
 
- each "tstafile" owns:
 
= tstatwriter:
 
* provides methods of writing sections & statvars to a memory/file stream
 
- tstatreader:
 
* holds list of sections with statvars each
 
* provides search & check & reading interface to the statvars
 
* provides reading statvars from a memory/file stream
 
  
Positioning to a section speeds up accessing its statvars
+
== Dialog ==
 +
=== TFileListview ===
 +
=== TFileDialog ===
 +
=== TFaceComp ===
 +
=== TFileNameEdit ===
 +
=== TDirDropdownEdit ===
 +
=== TColorEdit ===
 +
=== TMemoDialogEdit ===
 +
=== TPageSizeSelector ===
 +
=== TPageOrientationSelector ===
  
- there also is "tstatfiler" ( exposed by some "tstatfile" events ) which:
+
== Application ==
= may present or "tstatwriter" or "tstatreader" ( there's a check method )
+
=== TGuiApplication ===
= provides directionless "update" methods with internal switch to needed direction of processing
+
<pre>
- "reading" or "writing" statvars on per-section basis
+
tguiapplication = class(tcustomapplication)
 +
  public
 +
 
 +
  // [re]starts the system timer with the new period and
 +
  // subscribes the application to be a receiver of the modified "ek_timer" event
 +
  // ( can check for it in the event queue )
 +
  procedure settimer(const us: integer);
 +
 
 +
  // finds a window by its winID
 +
  function findwindow(id: winidty; out window: twindow): boolean;
 +
 
 +
  // finds a window by its ID & adjusts "rect" so that it
 +
  // fits "bounds_minc*" & "bounds_maxc*" of the found window
 +
  procedure checkwindowrect(winid: winidty; var rect: rectty);
  
=== TTimer ===
+
  // initialises the timer and "megraphics"
=== TNoGuiAction ===
+
  procedure initialize;
=== TPipeReadercomp ===
 
=== TSysEnvManager ===
 
=== TProcessMonitor ===
 
=== TFilechangeNotifier ===
 
=== TShortCutController ===
 
=== TPostscriptPrinter ===
 
=== TGdiPrinter ===
 
=== TWmfPrinter ===
 
=== TSkinController ===
 
=== TGuiThreadComp ===
 
  
== Font ==
+
  // frees the allocated system resources (GDI, event subscription, the timer)
=== Any Font ===
+
  procedure deinitialize;
<pre>
+
 
    charset { ANSI/ DEFAULT/ SYMBOL /SHIFTJIS /HANGEUL /GB2312 /CHINESEBIG5 /OEM
+
  // creates a form instance, it will be shown in "application.run"
/JOHAB / HEBREW/ ARABIC/ GREEK/ TURKISH/ VIETNAMESE/ THAI/ EASTEUROPE/
+
  procedure createform(instanceclass: widgetclassty; var reference);
RUSSIAN/ MAC/ BALTIC }
+
 
- changes the font to the nearest containing the selected encoding(charset)
+
  // invalidates all registered forms ( all their widgets will be redrawn )
- no font change made if the supplied encoding doesn't match any font
+
  procedure invalidate;
color
+
 
- color of the glyphs contours
+
  // calls a nested main event loop, forces processing any pending messages,
colorbackground
+
  procedure processmessages; override; //handle with care!
- fill color of the glyph cells ( not including extraspace )
+
 
colorshadow
+
  // TRUE if no pending events to process for the application
- color of SE glyph "edges" ( if not "cl_none", deactivates "colorbackground" )
+
  function idle: boolean; override;
extraspace
+
 
- v-space between glyph cells of adjacent text rows (negative values cause the cells to overlap )
+
  // requests to indicate waiting ( to show the "watches" cursors )
height
+
  procedure beginwait; override;
- v-size of glyph cells, in pixels
+
 
name
+
  // removes the "watches" if no unclosed requests for displaying them,
- initially, font is choosen by { "family" = this name }
+
  // otherwise closes the currently active request
options:
+
  procedure endwait; override;
foo_fixed
 
- changes the font to the nearest "mono" spaced (usually = Courier)
 
foo_proportional
 
- changes the font to the nearest "proportionally" spaced (usually = Helvetica)
 
foo_helvetica
 
- changes the font to the nearest in "sans" category (usually = Helvetica)
 
foo_roman
 
- changes the font to the nearest in "serif" category (usually = Times[ New Roman])
 
foo_script
 
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "script" category
 
foo_decorative
 
- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "decorative" category
 
foo_antialiased
 
- Linux-only, enables antialiasing (if disabled by Xft globally)
 
foo_nonantialiased
 
- Linux-only, disables antialiasing (if enabled by Xft globally)
 
usually making glyph extents (not cells !) a bit wider
 
style:
 
fs_bold
 
- gives the font a "bold" look
 
fs_italic
 
- gives the font an "italic" look
 
fs_underline
 
- gives the font an "underlined" look
 
fs_strikeout
 
- gives the font a "striked out" look
 
fs_selected
 
- "TRUE" here combined with {tf_noselect:=FALSE}, causes the text described by this font
 
to be initially selected ( with the clipboard operations available ),
 
currently applicable only to richstrings
 
  
width
+
  // TRUE if there are unclosed requests for displaying "watches"
- 10*{ glyph cell width, average in pixels }, 0 = {font default}
+
  function waiting: boolean;
  
xscale
+
  // TRUE if ESC has just been pressed
- width ratio of each glyph {cell & contour}, the effect is similar to "width"
+
  //  - if all requests for displaying "watches" are closed then refreshes
 +
  //    the internal list of events ( the GUI-queue -> the app event list)
 +
  function waitescaped: boolean; //true if escape pressed while waiting
  
*** "foo_*" font selection overrides one made with "name"
+
  // sets state of the current wait dialogue ( but doesn't close one ) to undefined
 +
  procedure resetwaitdialog; 
  
*** if change with "foo_*" is usuccessful then the nearest "sans" font is usually choosen
+
  // runs "aexecuteaction" in the main thread in OnIdle mode,
 +
  // then shows a cancellable message,
 +
  // if the one is cancelled then runs "acancelaction" then  
 +
  // either fully clears (if exceptions occur )
 +
  // or terminates the execution otherwise,
 +
  // true if not cancelled;
 +
  // "application.processmessages" must be called regularly if "aexecuteaction" is used here,
 +
  // alternatively "aidleaction" can be used, call sleep ( some time ) in order to minimize
 +
  // processor load.
 +
  // If athread <> nil the function starts and terminates the thread   
 +
  function waitdialog(const athread: tthreadcomp = nil; const atext: msestring = '';
 +
                  const caption: msestring = '';
 +
                  const acancelaction: notifyeventty = nil;
 +
                  const aexecuteaction: notifyeventty = nil): boolean; override;
  
*** The categories :
+
  // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "cancelled" state
 +
  procedure cancelwait;
  
sans => have no serifs and have strokes of even thickness
+
  // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "ok" state
serif => have serifs at glyph contours and made up of strokes of varying thickness
+
  procedure terminatewait;
script => resemble handwriting
 
decorative => flashy styles to be used sparingly in headlines or posters
 
  
<pre/>
+
  function waitstarted: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue is currently showing for some requests
 +
  function waitcanceled: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue has been cancelled for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
 +
  function waitterminated: boolean; // the last waitdialogue has been terminated for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
  
== GUI ==
+
  // if called from the main app thread then shows as a modal message describing the exception
=== TWindow ===
+
  // otherwise posts an async event for which the message will be called
<pre>
+
  procedure showexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = ''); override;
twindow = class(teventobject,icanvas)
 
  public
 
  
// releases mouse, unlinks from the canvas, processes all pending events of the window
+
  // posts an async event for which the message describing the exception will be called
// if called from within main thead then destroys the window directly
+
  procedure showasyncexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = '');
// otherwise posts a window destroy event for oneself and waits for it to be processed
 
procedure destroywindow;
 
  
// registers the instance of onself in the "owner" widget, allocates the canvas,
+
  // "application.errormessage" shows standard error message ( with "ERROR" title )  
// adds a reference to oneself,
+
  procedure errormessage(const amessage: msestring); override;
// then prepares the "owner" hierarchy to be invalidated ( "owner.rootchanged" )
 
// since now, the window is allocated and belongs to the "aowner" widget
 
constructor create(aowner: twidget);
 
  
destructor destroy; override;
+
  // [re]calculates timings & position of hint for "ahintedwidget"
 +
  // if "ow_timedhint" in "ahintedwidget.foptionswidget" then iys showtime will be
 +
  // "defaulthintshowtime" ( an app wide setting, 3sec by default) 
 +
  procedure inithintinfo(var info: hintinfoty; const ahintedwidget: twidget);
  
// adds "method" to the internal list of scroll dependants
 
procedure registeronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
 
  
// removes "method" from the internal list of scroll dependants
+
  // shows the supplied hint text within "aposrect" with alignment "aplacement" during "ashowtime",
procedure unregisteronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);
+
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
 +
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
 +
              const aposrect: rectty; const aplacement: captionposty = cp_bottomleft;
 +
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
 +
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
 +
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
 +
                      ); overload;
  
// releases mouse if captured, resets the cursor, then enters an event loop for the window,
+
  // shows the supplied hint text at left-top position"apos" during "ashowtime",
// TRUE on return if the window is destroyed
+
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
function beginmodal: boolean;
+
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
+
              const apos: pointty;
  * checks if the "sender" window is already modal to avoid circularity,
+
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
    if not then starts an event loop  for the "sender" where the "sender" is a receiver of GUI events,
+
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
      once the loop is terminated reactivates the previously active window if it was,
+
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
    TRUE if modalwindow destroyed 
+
                      ); overload;
 +
 
 +
  // shows the hint fully defined in "info" for the widget "sender"
 +
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const info: hintinfoty); overload;
  
  function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
+
  // removes the current hint widget & frees its resources & stops its stop timer
 +
  procedure hidehint;
  
// removes the internal stuff which indicates the modal state
+
  // restarts the current hint and its stop timer
procedure endmodal;
+
  procedure restarthint(const sender: twidget);
  
// if the window is visible,
+
  function hintedwidget: twidget; //last hinted widget
// deactivates the previously active window, shows the window (see below),
+
  function activehintedwidget: twidget; //nil if no hint active
// if no active window in the app or the window or its Z-predescessor is modal and
 
// the app has no focused widget then prepares the bound widget to be focused,
 
// then addresses the WM to put the window to foreground
 
procedure activate;
 
  
  // if the bound widget has visible=true then:
+
  // returns helpcontext of active widget, '' if none; 
  //  - if NOT windowevent then :
+
   function activehelpcontext: msestring;
  //   = address the WM to set size of the window acc to window opts
+
 
  //      wp_maximized, wp_fullscreen or normal size otherwise
+
  // returns helpcontext of the widget under mouse, '' if none;
  // = if the window is normally sized, moves it to its default position is specified ( screen centered etc )
+
  function mousehelpcontext: msestring;
  // - unhides/unminimizes the window if needed
 
  // - shows other windows of the applications acc to state of the window group
 
  // ( in normal size or minimized )
 
  
  private
+
  // TRUE if one of the app's window/console is in input focus
procedure twindow.show(windowevent: boolean);
+
  function active: boolean;
  
// TRUE if this window currently grabs user input
+
  // returns the desktop resolution ( or the virtual one if used )
( a widget drawn within the window(=form) is in focus,.. )
+
  function screensize: sizety;
function active: boolean;
 
  
// if the window was active then deactivates the window  & remembers it as the previous active ( to restore leater if requested ),
+
  // returns the (virtual) desktop resolution except the tray area,
// returns TRUE if that storage occured
+
  // nil -> current active window
function deactivateintermediate: boolean;  
+
  function workarea(const awindow: twindow = nil): rectty;
  
// makes the window active & clears the above app reference to it ( "active before deactivating" )
+
  // returns which application window ( a form not an eventwidget, an openglwidget or a windowwidget !)
procedure reactivate; //clears app.finactivewindow
+
  // is active ( provides the input focus ),
 +
  // it's same for all widgets of the form served by this window
 +
  function activewindow: twindow;
  
// scans the app event queue for "ek_expose" event[s] addressed to the window,
+
/ * A transient window is a descendant of ( "transientfor" ) another window in the stacking order hierarchy */
// if found then redraws that part of the window which the event describes
 
// ( processed events are then deleted )
 
procedure update;
 
  
// TRUE if the window :
+
  // returns a first non-transient ( on top of the app stacking order ) window upward
// 1) doesn't have an inner widget grabbing input focus
+
  // from the currently active window of the application.
// or
+
  // or that active window if no such
// 2) has such widget, and this widget ( and all its descendants )
+
   function regularactivewindow: twindow;
//   pass "CanClose" check
+
 
//
+
  // same as "activewindow" but the window must not be released (?)
// *** see also "twidget.CanClose" ***
+
  function unreleasedactivewindow: twindow;
//
+
 
function candefocus: boolean;
+
  // returns the focused widget of the currently active window if one exists
 +
  function activewidget: twidget;
  
// tries to defocus the currently focused widget if it belongs to the window,
+
  // returns the widget presenteing the currently active window
// if succeeds then executes code of virtual "DoDefocus" of the widget descessor
+
  function activerootwidget: twidget;
// ( this code defines behaviour & look of the widget on defocusing );
 
//
 
// no defocusing is done if the focused widget ( or its descendants )
 
// doesn't pass "CanClose" check
 
//
 
procedure nofocus;
 
 
    
 
    
  // setfocusedwidget(widget)
+
  // returns the window ( not hidden or disabled !) under the screen point "pos"
 
+
   function windowatpos(const pos: pointty): twindow;
  property focuscount: cardinal read ffocuscount;
+
 
   function close: boolean; //true if ok
+
  // puts to "awidget" the container of widget pointed by "namepath"
  procedure beginmoving; //lock window rect modification
+
   // ( finalizing "." is discarded if found ) ,
  procedure endmoving;
+
   // FALSE if not found, and NIL and TRUE if "namepath" = ''
  procedure bringtofront;
+
   function findwidget(const namepath: string; out awidget: twidget): boolean;
  procedure sendtoback;
 
  procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twindow);
 
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means top
 
   procedure stackover(const predecessor: twindow);
 
      //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means bottom
 
   function stackedunder: twindow; //nil if top
 
   function stackedover: twindow; //nil if bottom
 
  function hastransientfor: boolean;
 
  
   procedure capturemouse;
+
   // rebuilds the application's window list accorrding to the current on-screen Z-order of its windows;
   procedure releasemouse;
+
   // window list is ordered by "z" - bottom first & top last;
   procedure postkeyevent(const akey: keyty;
+
  // invisibles first
        const ashiftstate: shiftstatesty = []; const release: boolean = false;
+
   procedure sortzorder;
                  const achars: msestring = '');
 
  
   function winid: winidty;
+
   // returns a copy of the internal window list of application
  function haswinid: boolean;
+
   function windowar: windowarty;
  function state: windowstatesty;
 
  function visible: boolean;
 
  function activating: boolean; //in internalactivate proc
 
  function normalwindowrect: rectty;
 
  property updateregion: regionty read fupdateregion;
 
   function updaterect: rectty;
 
  
   procedure registermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
+
   // returns the list of application window winIDs
   procedure unregistermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
+
  function winidar: winidarty;
 +
 
 +
  // returns the count of the application windows   
 +
   function windowcount: integer;
  
   property options: windowoptionsty read foptions;
+
  // returns the window by its number ( "index" >= 0) in the application window list
 +
   property windows[const index: integer]: twindow read getwindows;
  
// widget
+
  // returns the lowest visible window in stackorder,
property owner: twidget read fowner;
+
  // calls "sortzorder" within
 +
  function bottomwindow: twindow;
  
   property focusedwidget: twidget read ffocusedwidget;
+
   // returns the highest visible window in stackorder,
   property transientfor: twindow read ftransientfor;
+
   // calls "sortzorder" within
   property modalresult: modalresultty read fmodalresult write setmodalresult;
+
   function topwindow: twindow;
  property buttonendmodal: boolean read getbuttonendmodal write setbuttonendmodal;
 
  property globalshortcuts: boolean read getglobalshortcuts write setglobalshortcuts;
 
  property localshortcuts: boolean read getlocalshortcuts write setlocalshortcuts;
 
  property windowpos: windowposty read getwindowpos write setwindowpos;
 
  property caption: msestring read fcaption write setcaption;
 
  
  
windowoptionty = (wo_popup,wo_message,wo_buttonendmodal,wo_groupleader,
+
  // TRUE if all owned windows pass "CanClose" check or
                  wo_windowcentermessage); //showmessage centered in window
+
  // don't have focused widgets
 +
  function candefocus: boolean;
  
 +
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive keyboard events
 +
  procedure registeronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
  
optionswindow:
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving keyboard events
wo_popup
+
  procedure unregisteronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
- in run-time, hides all OS windows-manager ( WM ) decorations (title bar, buttons "Close/Resize,Min/Max" etc),
 
letting only its client area to appear
 
so :
 
= the window should have own facilities to replace the deactivated WM functionality if needed
 
= can't be resized/maximize/minimized/moved
 
wo_message
 
- similar to "wo_popup" but allows WM to close ( with "Close" button ) & move the window
 
  
wo_groupleader
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive shortcut events
- keeps on the WM taskbar a shortcut to the window
+
  procedure registeronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
( if the parent window is a groupleader too then dislpays a step upper in its group )
 
  
Event handlers:
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving shortcut events
 +
  procedure unregisteronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
  
- onmove
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
= fires once the (window/widget) is created/moved ( with check if really moved by a distance)
+
  procedure registeronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
  
<pre/>
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
=== TFaceList ===
+
  procedure unregisteronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
=== TFrameComp ===
 
 
Terminilogy :
 
  
{client area = area of the widget which interacts with a user}
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure registeronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
  
{bevelling = additional facets rising/sinking frame & client area,
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
constists of two parts -  
+
  procedure unregisteronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
- external: between frame and widget
 
- internal: between frame and client area
 
}
 
  
{frame= flat space between external & internal facets,
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
floats at the inner level of the external facet
+
  procedure registeronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
}
 
  
*** Both frame & bevelling affect the client area ***
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" form receiving "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure unregisteronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
  
--------------------------
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
template:
+
  procedure registeronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
  
colorclient = color of the client area
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure unregisteronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
  
colorframe = color of the frame
+
// tcustomapplication
colorframeactive = used instead of colorframe if the widget is
 
active; "cl_default" means same as colorframe.
 
  
works if (leveli/levelo <> 0 that's the facets exist :
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminated" event ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure registeronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
  
colorshadow = color of facets screened from the NW light source
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminated" events ( form-wide )
colordkshadow = color of shadows dropped by the NW light source
+
  procedure unregisteronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
                colordkwidth = width of the shadows in pixel, -1=default
 
  
colorlight = color of facets exposed to the NW light source
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
colorhighlight = color of brighter edges of the facets
+
  procedure registeronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
                colorhlwidth = width of the brighter edges in pixel, -1=default
 
  
        extraspace = if applied to menu items, adds more space between these items
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
 +
  procedure unregisteronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
  
framei_:
+
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnIdle" event ( form-wide )
(for extendable widgets like menus, these settings widen the widget,
+
  procedure registeronidle(const method: idleeventty);
for non-extendable like buttons - they squeeze the text area )
 
  
bottom= lower margin of text to the client area
+
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnIdle" events ( form-wide )
left = left margin of text to the client area
+
  procedure unregisteronidle(const method: idleeventty);
right = margin of text to the client area
 
top = upper margin of text to the client area
 
  
framewidth= width of the frame
+
  // calls "canclose" of all application windows except the "sender" window
leveli = {width=height} of the internal facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
+
  // if all "canclose"are TRUE then checks "OnTerminateQuery"
levelo = {width=height} of the external facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
+
  // for all its subscribers ( usually forms of the application )
 +
  procedure terminate(const sender: twindow = nil);
  
<any frame>
+
  // TRUE as long as a "terminate" call is in progress
 +
  function terminating: boolean;
  
*** extends & customizes "tframecomp" ***
+
  // TRUE as long as a "deinitialize" call is in progress
 +
  function deinitializing: boolean;
 +
 
 +
  // returns the current caret object ( the text input focus indicator ) of the application
 +
  / ( this object provides facilities to control position & appearance & visibility & timings of the caret )
 +
  property caret: tcaret read fcaret;
  
template
+
  // returns the current mouse object of the application
- "tframecomp" supplying the initial settings
+
  / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance of the mouse ) 
 +
  property mouse: tmouse read fmouse;
  
colorclient,colordkshadow,colordkwidth,colorframe,colorframeactive,
+
  // simulates mouseparkevent
colorhighlight,colorhlwidth,colorlight,colorshadow,framewidth,  
+
  // ( an adjusting mouse movement without user intervention - grid snapping, docking etc ?)
leveli, levelo, framei_*,
+
  procedure mouseparkevent;
  
<see "tframecomp">
+
  // sets mouse position correction for further mouse events,
 +
  // the real position is less the visual one by the supplied shift
 +
  procedure delayedmouseshift(const ashift: pointty);
  
font
+
  // returns/sets a cursor shape used for widgets having their cursor shape set to "cr_default";
<see "tfont">
+
  // setting it to "cr_default" restores the individual widget cursor(s)
 +
  property widgetcursorshape: cursorshapety read fwidgetcursorshape write
 +
                                        fwidgetcursorshape;
  
caption
+
  // returns/sets the current application-wide cursor shape ( not "watches" if a waiting dialog is currently displayed ! )
- some descriptive text( function name, user prompt,...) placed
+
  // or request to set a new cursor shape ( app-wide );
in a N/W/S/E-combination to the widget's client area
+
  // doesn't change when changing mouse widgets
 +
  //
 +
  // if called from a non-main app thread & no waiting dialogue displayed then redraws
 +
  // the cursor immediately;
 +
  // set it to "cr_default" to restore the shape to one set by "widgetcursorshape"
 +
  //
 +
  property cursorshape: cursorshapety; // cr_arrow, cr_*
  
***
+
  // assures the displayed mouse cursor shape to be the shape assigned to the currently under-mouse widget,
non-empty caption if (captionpos <> cp_center) & (captiondistouter=false & captiondist>0) enlarges the framed widget  
+
  // otherwise "cr_default"
by the corresponding size of caption
+
  procedure updatecursorshape; //restores cursorshape of mousewidget
  
***
+
  // returns a widget of the application where the mouse is currently positioned over
 +
  property mousewidget: twidget read fmousewidget;
  
captiondist - margin between the caption & the client area
+
  // returns a widget of the application currently "owning" the mouse ( grabbing all mouse input )
 +
  property mousecapturewidget: twidget read fmousecapturewidget;
  
captiondistouter :
 
  
- if "false"(by default), the distance is measured between
+
  // returns/sets a window to become the main window of the application
the inner (facing the client area) extent of the caption
+
  // then resets all other application windows to the window group it belongs to ( Linux only );
and the client area outward the area,
+
  //
the caption is placed outside of the client area
+
  // the main window minimizes all windows if minimized;
 +
  property mainwindow: twindow read fmainwindow write setmainwindow;
 +
 
 +
  // returns which system thread was allocated to the application on its start
 +
  // ( the main thread )
 +
  property thread: threadty read fthread;
  
- if "true", the caption is mirrored against the edge of client area as
+
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button click occured last time
to the position when "false"
+
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
 +
  property buttonpresswidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonpresswidgetbefore;
  
*** nagative values of "captiondist" visually inverse "out of" and within ***
+
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button release occured last time
 +
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
 +
  property buttonreleasewidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonreleasewidgetbefore;
  
      captionnoclip - do not clip frame and client area for caption background
 
( the client area preserves own background under the caption text)
 
  
captionnooffset - shift orthogonal to "captiondist"
+
  // returns/sets the interval of mouse double click recognition ( in microsecs ),
 +
  // defaults to 0.4 sec
 +
  property dblclicktime: integer read fdblclicktime write fdblclicktime default
 +
                defaultdblclicktime; //us
  
captionpos - "corner" where to place the caption
+
// tcustomapplication
  
localprops :
+
  // creates a datamodule instance ( its startup code including "OnLoaded" is executed )
 +
  procedure createdatamodule(instanceclass: msecomponentclassty; var reference);
  
frl_levelo - "levelo" overrides "template.levelo"
 
frl_leveli - "leveli" overrides "template.leveli"
 
frl_framewidth - "framewidth" overrides "template.framewidth"
 
frl_colorclient - "colorclient" overrides "template.colorclient"
 
frl_colorframe - "colorframe" overrides "template.colorframe"
 
frl_colorframeactive - "colorframeactive" overrides "template.colorframeactive"
 
frl_colordkshadow - "colordkshadow" overrides "template.colordkshadow"
 
frl_colorshadow - "colorshadow" overrides "template.colorshadow"
 
frl_colorlight - "colorlight" overrides "template.colorlight"
 
frl_colorhighlight - "colorhighlight" overrides "template.colorhighlight"
 
frl_colordkwidth - "colordkwidth" overrides "template.colordkwidth"
 
frl_colorhlwidth - "colorhlwidth" overrides "template.colorhlwidth"
 
frl_fileft - "framei_left" overrides "template.framei_left"
 
frl_firight - "framei_right" overrides "template.framei_right"
 
frl_fitop - "framei_top" overrides "template.framei_top"
 
frl_fibottom - "framei_bottom" overrides "template.framei_bottom"
 
  
frl_nodisable
+
  // enters the application event loop;
 +
  //
 +
  // once the loop finishes, performs "OnTerminated" for all its subscribers,
 +
  // destroys all application forms ( components & windows )
 +
  procedure run;
  
=== TFaceComp ===
+
  // TRUE if the eventloop is entered
- doesn't affect the widget frame but client area of the frame
+
  function running: boolean;
  
 +
  // returns/sets the application name
 +
  // ( defaults to the full path to application executable in the native OS format );
 +
  // currently, only for informatiion query purposes
 +
  property applicationname: msestring read fapplicationname write fapplicationname;
 +
 
  
template:
+
  // if exclusive "rights" are satisfied for the main thread ( a mutex lock is OK )  & the event loop is in progress
fade:
+
  // then posts the "event" to the main application thread for asyc processing,
color[i]: = colors forming the fade
+
  // otherwise adds the event to the internal list for further handling as soon as the above conditions meet
direction: = direction where the fade grows to
+
  procedure postevent(event: tevent);
gd_(right/up/left/down)
 
  
pos[i]: = relational position of color[i] on the direction (0.0..1.0) extent
+
  // TRUE if never idle since last call,
 +
  // unlocks the application and calls sleep if not mainthread and asleepus >= 0
 +
  function checkoverload(const asleepus: integer = 100000): boolean;
  
transparency = makes the face half-transparent and enlight the underlying widget 
+
  // returns/sets the application exception handler
with a light source of the selected color
+
  property onexception: exceptioneventty read fonexception write fonexception;
( in this case, colors of the face & the widget & the light source
 
simply summarize to higher brightness )
 
  
image:
+
  // if not "eabort" & no unhandled exceptions,
see <any image>
+
  // executes the above "OnException" code if assigned
 +
  // or shows an exception message otherwise;
 +
  procedure handleexception(sender: tobject = nil;
 +
                                      const leadingtext: string = '');
  
options:
+
  // synchronizes the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex),
 +
  // TRUE if the calling thread allready holds the mutex,
 +
  // the mutex is recursive
 +
  function lock: boolean;
  
        *** The fade colors are used not as colors but RGB alpha values ($00 -> opaque, $ff -> transparent)  
+
  // tries to synchronize the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex)
if fao_alpha* are set *** :
+
  function trylock: boolean;
  
fao_alphafadeall = applies blending to the widget & all its childs
+
  // releases the mutex if the calling thread holds the mutex,
fao_alphafadenochildren = preserves child widgets from blending
+
  // TRUE if no unlock done
                fao_alphafadeimage = applies blending to "face.image"
+
  function unlock: boolean;
  
 +
  // releases the mutex recursively if the calling thread holds the mutex,
 +
  // returns "count" for the below "relockall"
 +
  function unlockall: integer;
  
<any face>
+
  // regains the mutex to serve "count" locks
 +
  procedure relockall(count: integer);
  
*** extends & customizes "tfacecomp" ***
+
  // creates a syncronize event ( which will fire asyncronously then waits for another thread will allow it to finish ), assigns "proc" to it as the event handler,
 +
  // then frees all locks temporarily then posts the event to the app event queue & waits fot it to be processed the resores the locks;
 +
  //
 +
  // TRUE if not aborted, quiet -> shows no exceptions if occurs
 +
  //
 +
  // the "syncronize event" is an event owning a semaphore which can be touched by another thread
 +
  // thus causing "event.waitfo" to return & to exec the event handler code
 +
  //
 +
  function synchronize(const proc: objectprocty;
 +
                      const quite: boolean = false): boolean;
  
fade, image, option
+
  // TRUE if the calling ( this function ) thread is the application main thread
- see "tfacecomp"
+
  function ismainthread: boolean;
 
template
 
- "tfacecomp" supplying the initial settings
 
  
localprops :
+
  // TRUE if the currently locked thread is the application main thread
fal_options - "options" overrides "template.options"
+
  function islockthread: boolean;
fal_fadirection - "fade.direction" overrides "template.fade.direction"
 
fal_image - "image" overrides "template.image"
 
fal_fapos - "fade.pos[i]" overrides "template.fade.pos[i]"
 
fal_facolor - "fade.color[i]" overrides "template.fade.color[i]"
 
fal_fatransparency - "fade.transparency" overrides "template.fade.transparency"
 
  
=== TBitmapComp ===
+
  // waith for "athread" to terminate,
=== TImageList ===
+
  // does "unlock-relock" around waiting
=== TPopupMenu ===
+
  procedure waitforthread(athread: tmsethread);
=== TMainMenu ===
+
 
 +
  // post a "nothing-to-do" event for asynchronous processing in the main thread
 +
  procedure wakeupmainthread;
  
== Dialog ==
+
  // invalidates all registered forms of the application so that their widgets redraw land-specific captions
=== TFileListview ===
+
  // ( changed by "mseconsts.setlangconsts" ),
=== TFileDialog ===
+
  // called internally in "setlangconsts" before return
=== TFaceComp ===
+
  procedure langchanged; virtual;
=== TFileNameEdit ===
 
=== TDirDropdownEdit ===
 
=== TColorEdit ===
 
=== TMemoDialogEdit ===
 
=== TPageSizeSelector ===
 
=== TPageOrientationSelector ===
 
  
== Application ==
+
  // returns/sets "aps_terminated" state flag ( no actions ? )
=== TGuiApplication ===
+
  // this flag is also set internally by "terminate" if not cancelled
<pre>
+
  property terminated: boolean read getterminated write setterminated;
tguiapplication = class(tcustomapplication)
 
  public
 
  
   // [re]starts the system timer with the new period and
+
   // returns the number of "handleexception" calls having an effect ( a message or the handler code )
  // subscribes the application to be a receiver of the modified "ek_timer" event
+
   property exceptioncount: longword read fexceptioncount;
  // ( can check for it in the event queue )
 
   procedure settimer(const us: integer);
 
  
  // finds a window by its winID
 
  function findwindow(id: winidty; out window: twindow): boolean;
 
  
  // finds a window by its ID & adjusts "rect" so that it
+
private
  // fits "bounds_minc*" & "bounds_maxc*" of the found window
+
// function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
  procedure checkwindowrect(winid: winidty; var rect: rectty);
 
  
  // inits the timer and "megraphics"
+
</pre>
  procedure initialize;
 
  
  // frees the allocated system resources (GDI, event subsription, the timer)
+
== DB ==
  procedure deinitialize;
 
  
  // creates a form instance, it will be shown in "application.run"
+
=== DBedit ===
  procedure createform(instanceclass: widgetclassty; var reference);
+
=== DBfields ===
 +
=== TDBwidgetgrid ===
 +
<pre>
 +
  Properties:
  
  // invalidates all registered forms ( all their widgets will be redrawn )
+
        anchors - ...
  procedure invalidate;
+
bounds - ...
 
 
  // calls a nested main eventloop, forces processing any pending messages,
 
  procedure processmessages; override; //handle with care!
 
  
  // TRUE if no pending events to process for the application
+
color
  function idle: boolean; override;
+
- color of the grid's client area
 
+
cursor
  // requests to indicate waiting ( to show the "watches" cursos )
+
- cursor shape when the mouse is over the client area
  procedure beginwait; override;
 
  
  // removes the "watches" if no unclosed requests for displaying them,
+
datacols
  // otherwise closes the currently active request
+
colorselect
  procedure endwait; override;
+
linecolor
 +
linecolorfix
 +
linewidth
 +
newrowcol
  
  // TRUE if there're unclosed requests for displaying "watches"
+
options
  function waiting: boolean;
+
co_readonly
 
+
co_nofocus
  // TRUE if ESC has just been pressed
+
co_invisible
  //  - if all requests for displaying "watches" are closed then refreshes
+
co_disabled
  //    the internal list of events ( the GUI-queue -> the app event list)
+
co_drawfocus
  function waitescaped: boolean; //true if escape pressed while waiting
+
co_mousemovefocus
 
+
co_lefbuttonfocusonly
  // sets state of the current wait dialogue ( but doesn't close one ) to undefined
+
co_focusselect
  procedure resetwaitdialog; 
+
co_mouseselect
 
+
co_keyselect
  // runs "aexecuteaction" in the main thread in OnIdle mode,
+
co_multiselect
  // then shows a cancellable message,
+
co_resetselectionexit
  // if the one is cancelled then runs "acancelaction" then
+
co_rowselect
  // either fully clears (if exceptions occur )
+
co_fixwidth
  // or terminates the execution otherwise,
+
co_fixpos
  // true if not cancelled;
+
co_fill
  // "application.processmessages" must be called regularly if "aexecuteaction" is used here,
+
co_proportional
  // alternatively "aidleaction" can be used, call sleep ( some time ) in order to minimize
+
co_nohscroll
  // processor load.
+
co_savevalue
  // If athread <> nil the function starts and terminates the thread   
+
co_savestate
  function waitdialog(const athread: tthreadcomp = nil; const atext: msestring = '';
+
co_rowfont
                  const caption: msestring = '';
+
co_rowcolor
                  const acancelaction: notifyeventty = nil;
+
co_zebracolor
                  const aexecuteaction: notifyeventty = nil): boolean; override;
+
co_nosort
 +
co_sortdescent
 +
co_norearrange
 +
co_cancopy
 +
co_canpaste
 +
co_mousescrollrow
 +
co_rowdatachange
  
  // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "cancelled" state
+
sortcol
  procedure cancelwait;
+
width
  
  // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "ok" state
+
items[N]
  procedure terminatewait;
+
color
 
+
colorselect
  function waitstarted: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue is currently showing for some requests
+
datalist - ???
  function waitcanceled: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue has been cancelled for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
+
face - see <any face>
  function waitterminated: boolean; // the last waitdialogue has been terminated for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
+
fontselect - see <any font>
 +
frame - see <any frame>
 +
linecolor
 +
linecolorfix
 +
linewidth
 +
name
 +
 +
options
 +
 +
</pre>
  
  // if called from the main app thread then shows as a modal message describing the exception
+
=== Report ===
  // otherwise posts an async event for which the message will be called
 
  procedure showexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = ''); override;
 
  
  // posts an async event for which the message describing the exception will be called
+
==== TRepSpacer ====
  procedure showasyncexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = '');
+
==== TRecordBand ====
 +
==== TrepValueDisp ====
 +
==== TRepPageNumdisp ====
 +
==== TRepPrintDateDisp ====
 +
==== TBandGroup ====
 +
==== TTileArea ====
  
  // "application.errormessage" shows standard error message ( with "ERROR" title )
+
== Design ==
  procedure errormessage(const amessage: msestring); override;
 
  
  // [re]calculates timings & position of hint for "ahintedwidget"
+
=== TGdbMi ===
  // if "ow_timedhint" in "ahintedwidget.foptionswidget" then iys showtime will be
+
=== TSyntaxEdit ===
  // "defaulthintshowtime" ( an app wide setting, 3sec by default) 
+
=== TSyntaxPainter ===
  procedure inithintinfo(var info: hintinfoty; const ahintedwidget: twidget);
 
  
 +
== Comm ==
  
  // shows the supplied hint text within "aposrect" with alignment "aplacement" during "ashowtime",
+
=== TCommPort ===
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
+
=== TAsciiCommPort ===
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
+
=== TAsciiProtPort ===
              const aposrect: rectty; const aplacement: captionposty = cp_bottomleft;
+
=== TCommSelector ===
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
 
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
 
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
 
                      ); overload;
 
  
  // shows the supplied hint text at left-top position"apos" during "ashowtime",
+
== General stuff==
  // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove 
 
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
 
              const apos: pointty;
 
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
 
                // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
 
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
 
                      ); overload;
 
  
  // shows the hint fully defined in "info" for the widget "sender"
+
=== Properties for all widgets ===
  procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const info: hintinfoty); overload;
+
<pre>
  
  // removes the current hint widget & frees its resources & stops its stop timer
+
name
  procedure hidehint;
 
  
  // restarts the current hint and its stop timer
+
anchors
  procedure restarthint(const sender: twidget);
 
  
  function hintedwidget: twidget; //last hinted widget
+
-----------
  function activehintedwidget: twidget; //nil if no hint active
 
  
  // returns helpcontext of active widget, '' if none; 
+
- they control of design/runtime sticking widgets to their parents
  function activehelpcontext: msestring;
 
  
  // returns helpcontext of the widget under mouse, '' if none;
+
- dimention pair ( top/bottom or left/right ) both set to "false" cause
  function mousehelpcontext: msestring;
+
the widget to fit the parent's client area in that dimention;
 +
this effect may be partial in case of "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
  
  // TRUE if one of the app's window/console is in input focus
+
*** Return to the look "before dimention fit" is only possible by manual resizing or setting "bounds_*"
  function active: boolean;
+
-----------
 +
an_left
 +
- on run-time, resizes/shifts left the widget to keep the design-set distance
 +
between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
 +
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
  
  // returns the desktop resolution ( or the virtual one if used )
+
an_top
  function screensize: sizety;
+
- on run-time, resizes/shifts up the widget to keep the design-set distance
 +
between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
 +
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
  
  // returns the (virtual) desktop resolution except the tray area,
+
an_right
  // nil -> current active window
+
- on run-time, resizes/shifts right the widget to keep the design-set distance
  function workarea(const awindow: twindow = nil): rectty;
+
between the widget's right border and the right side of parent's client area  
 +
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
  
  // returns which application window ( a form not an eventwidget, an openglwidget or a windowwidget !)
+
an_bottom
  // is active ( provides the input focus ),
+
- on run-time, resizes/shifts down the widget to keep the design-set distance
  // it's same for all widgets of the form served by this window
+
between the widget's bottom border and the lower side of parent's client area
  function activewindow: twindow;
+
as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins
  
/ * A transient window is a descendant of ( "transientfor" ) another window in the stacking order hierarchy */
+
bounds
  
  // returns a first non-transient ( on top of the app stacking order ) window upward
+
cx - width of the widget
  // from the currently active window of the application.
+
cxmax, cxmin - design/runtime width of the widget is enforced between "cxmax" and "cxmin"
  // or that active window if no such
+
cy - height of the widget
  function regularactivewindow: twindow;
+
cymax, cymin - design/runtime height of the widget is enforced between "cymax" and "cymin"
 +
x - distance between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area
 +
y - distance between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area
  
  // same as "activewindow" but the window must not be released (?)
 
  function unreleasedactivewindow: twindow;
 
  
  // returns the focused widget of the currently active window if one exists
+
autosize
  function activewidget: twidget;
 
  
  // returns the widget presenteing the currently active window
+
-----------
  function activerootwidget: twidget;
+
- only applicable to widgets with "ow_autosize" set
 
+
- the effect may be partial in case when "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
  // returns the window ( not hidden or disabled !) under the screen point "pos"
+
-----------
  function windowatpos(const pos: pointty): twindow;
 
  
  // puts to "awidget" the container of widget pointed by "namepath"
+
cx - addition to width of the widget (with h-centering post applied)
  // ( finalizing "." is discarded if found ) ,
+
cy - addition to height of the widget (with v-centering post applied)
  // FALSE if not found, and NIL and TRUE if "namepath" = ''
 
  function findwidget(const namepath: string; out awidget: twidget): boolean;
 
  
  // rebuilds the application's window list accorrding to the current on-screen Z-order of its windows;
+
- color
  // window list is ordered by "z" - bottom first & top last;
+
= the default color of client area & caption text background
  // invisibles first
+
= may be overwritten:
  procedure sortzorder;
+
* the client area - with "frame.colorclient"
 +
* the caption BG - with "frame.font.colorbackground"
  
  // returns a copy of the internal window list of application
+
- font
  function windowar: windowarty;
+
= see {any font}
  
  // returns the list of application window winIDs
+
- frame
  function winidar: winidarty;
+
= see {any frame}
  
  // returns the count of the application windows   
+
- face
  function windowcount: integer;
+
= see {any face}
  
  // returns the window by its number ( "index" >= 0) in the application window list
+
- hint
  property windows[const index: integer]: twindow read getwindows;
+
= descriptive text appearing when mouse pointer enters the widget
  
  // returns the lowest visible window in stackorder,
+
- cursor
  // calls "sortzorder" within
+
= shape of the mouse pointer over the client area of widget (run-time only)
  function bottomwindow: twindow;
 
  
  // returns the highest visible window in stackorder,
+
- visible
  // calls "sortzorder" within
+
= "true" allow the widget to appear ( run-time only )
  function topwindow: twindow;
 
  
 +
- enabled
 +
= "true" allows the widget to participate in GUI interaction
 +
= "false" disallows the widget & its children :
 +
* processing all events & shortcuts & menu calls
 +
* auto "CanClose" check
  
  // TRUE if all owned windows pass "CanClose" check or
+
Also "false" usually paints the widget in color marking
  // don't have focused widgets
+
the "disabled" state ( usually light gray font color )
  function candefocus: boolean;
 
 
 
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive keyboard events
 
  procedure registeronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
 
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving keyboard events
+
- popupmenu
  procedure unregisteronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);
+
= reference to a preset tpopupmenu widget serving the right-click menu
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive shortcut events
+
- taborder
  procedure registeronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
+
- {0..N} order number when TAB-key cycling through widgets in the container
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving shortcut events
+
- tag
  procedure unregisteronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);
+
- an integer value bound to this widget instance
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
+
- helpcontext
  procedure registeronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
+
= a string returned by "(active/mouse)helpcontext" methods of the owning form  
 +
  when this widget is focused or under mouse in the active window
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
+
- zorder
  procedure unregisteronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);
+
= reading: finds the current Z-order of the widget's window
 +
= setting: if the value = 0 then lowers the widget's window in the stacking hierarchy, otherwise rises
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
 
  procedure registeronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
 
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
+
optionswidget:
  procedure unregisteronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);
 
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
+
ow_background
  procedure registeronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
+
- keeps the window/widget on bottom of the Z-order stack.
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" form receiving "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
+
ow_top
  procedure unregisteronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);
+
- keeps the window/widget in foreground
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
+
ow_noautosizing
  procedure registeronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
+
- when docking, not to resize for the docking area
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
+
ow_mousefocus
  procedure unregisteronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);
+
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with mouse
 +
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on mouse clicks )
  
// tcustomapplication
+
ow_tabfocus
 +
- "false" here disables focusing the widget with "TAB" key
 +
  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on TAB pressed )
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminated" event ( form-wide )
+
ow_parenttabfocus
  procedure registeronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
+
- enters the childs on TAB-focusing then returns to the widget after
 +
sequential TAB-ing through its child widgets,
 +
otherwise TAB-ing cycles on the children if entered
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminated" events ( form-wide )
+
ow_arrowfocus
  procedure unregisteronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);
+
- allows the widget ( and its children in turn ) to be focused with
 +
the arrow keys
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
+
ow_subfocus, ow_arrowfocusin, ow_arrowfocusout
  procedure registeronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
+
- in case of arrow keys focusing enabled for child-containing widget,
 +
determine behaviour on entering & leaving the widget, see the below table:
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
+
ow_subfocus | ow_arrowfocusin | ow_arrowfocusout | effect
  procedure unregisteronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);
 
  
  // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnIdle" event ( form-wide )
+
  FALSE          FALSE            FALSE        entering-/leaving-
  procedure registeronidle(const method: idleeventty);
+
  FALSE          FALSE            TRUE          entering-/leaving+
 +
  FALSE          TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
 +
  FALSE          TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
 +
  TRUE            FALSE            FALSE        entering(last focused)+/leaving-
 +
  TRUE            FALSE            TRUE          entering(last focused)+/leaving+
 +
  TRUE            TRUE              FALSE        entering(nearest)+/leaving-
 +
  TRUE            TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
  
  // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnIdle" events ( form-wide )
+
- "entering" is focusing on a child within the widget
  procedure unregisteronidle(const method: idleeventty);
+
- "leaving" is return from last child onto the widget's level
 +
- "nearest" is the child closest on the arrow direction
 +
- "last focused" is the child focused on last leaving the widget
 +
 +
*** The Up/Down arrow keys can leave from the children circle,
 +
but Left/Right can only toggle between the children ***
  
  // calls "canclose" of all application windows except the "sender" window
+
*** mouse entering/leaving isn't controllable by these options
  // if all "canclose"are TRUE then checks "OnTerminateQuery"
 
  // for all its subscribers ( usually forms of the application )
 
  procedure terminate(const sender: twindow = nil);
 
  
  // TRUE as long as a "terminate" call is in progress
 
  function terminating: boolean;
 
  
  // TRUE as long as a "deinitialize" call is in progress
+
ow_focusbackonesc
  function deinitializing: boolean;
+
- on pressing "Esc", returns input focus to the previously focused widget
 
 
  // returns the current caret object ( the text input focus indicator ) of the application
 
  / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance & visibility & timings of the caret )
 
  property caret: tcaret read fcaret;
 
  
  // returns the current mouse object of the application
+
ow_noparentshortcut
  / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance of the mouse ) 
 
  property mouse: tmouse read fmouse;
 
  
  // simulates mouseparkevent
+
*** disables processing of delegated ( from the parent ) shortcuts ***
  // ( an adjusting mouse movement without user intervention - grid snapping, docking etc ?)
 
  procedure mouseparkevent;
 
  
  // sets mouse position correction for further mouse events,
+
- "true" here disables processing shortcuts if they're delegated
  // the real position is less the visual one by the supplied shift
+
from the parent widget ( obviously, not processed by the parent )
  procedure delayedmouseshift(const ashift: pointty);
 
  
  // returns/sets a cursor shape used for widgets having their cursor shape set to "cr_default";
+
ow_nochildshortcut
  // setting it to "cr_default" restores the individual widget cursor(s)
 
  property widgetcursorshape: cursorshapety read fwidgetcursorshape write
 
                                        fwidgetcursorshape;
 
  
  // returns/sets the current application-wide cursor shape ( not "watches" if a waiting dialogue is curerntly displayed ! )
+
*** disables delegating shortcuts to the parent for taking decision ***  
  // or request to set a new cursor shape ( app-wide );
 
  // doesn't change when changing mouse widgets
 
  //
 
  // if called from a non-main app thread & no waiting dialogue displayed then redraws
 
  // the cursor immediately;
 
  // set it to "cr_default" to restore the shape to one set by "widgetcursorshape"
 
  //
 
  property cursorshape: cursorshapety; // cr_arrow, cr_*
 
  
  // assures the displayed mouse cursor shape to be the shape assigned to the currently under-mouse widget,
+
- if "true" then the widget tries to process it by oneself
  // otherwise "cr_default"
+
otherwise it's passed to the parent widget for further chaining
  procedure updatecursorshape; //restores cursorshape of mousewidget
 
  
  // returns a widget of the application where the mouse is currently positioned over
+
*** A shortcut can only be processed once ( by one widget ) ***
  property mousewidget: twidget read fmousewidget;
 
  
  // returns a widget of the application currently "owning" the mouse ( grabbing all mouse input )
+
ow_canclosenil
  property mousecapturewidget: twidget read fmousecapturewidget;
+
- "true" here allows to continue even if there's contained widget(s)  
 +
not passing "CanClose" check
  
 +
ow_mousetransparent
 +
- "true" here causes the widget oneself ( not its contained ones )
 +
not to react to mouse events ( just allow them through to the children )
  
  // returns/sets a window to become the main window of the application
+
ow_mousewheel
  // then resets all other application windows to the window group it belongs to ( Linux only );
+
- enables/disables {scrolling/navigating} with wheel of ImPS/2 etc mouse
  //
 
  // the main window minimizes all windows if minimized;
 
  property mainwindow: twindow read fmainwindow write setmainwindow;
 
  
  // returns which system thread was allocated to the application on its start
+
ow_noscroll
  // ( the main thread )
+
- don't use screen image scrolling for twidget.scrollrect,
  property thread: threadty read fthread;
+
redraw the whole scrolled widget rectangle instead;
 +
sometimes needed with background fades.
  
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button click occured last time
+
ow_nochildpaintclip
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
+
-
  property buttonpresswidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonpresswidgetbefore;
 
  
  // returns teh widget where a mouse button release occured last time
+
ow_destroywidgets
  // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
+
- "true" here causes calling "free" for all containing widgets as well
  property buttonreleasewidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonreleasewidgetbefore;
 
  
 +
ow_hinton
 +
- to show the hint even in case of hinting is disabled on the parent
 +
( "parent.ow_hintoff= true & parent.ow_hinton= false" )
  
  // returns/sets the interval of mouse double click recognition ( in microsecs),
+
ow_hintoff
  // defaults to 0.4 sec
+
- "true" here combined with "ow_hinton=false" fully disables displaying the hint
  property dblclicktime: integer read fdblclicktime write fdblclicktime default
+
 
                defaultdblclicktime; //us
+
ow_multiplehint
 +
- "true" here causes the widget to redisplay its hint on each {>3px} move within the widget oneself
  
// tcustomapplication
+
        ow_timedhint
 +
- "true" here causes hint of the widget to disappear after a timed inteval (about 2 secs by default)
  
  // creates a datamodule instance ( its startup code including "OnLoaded" is executed )
+
ow_fontlineheight (design-time only)
  procedure createdatamodule(instanceclass: msecomponentclassty; var reference);
+
- causes "extraspace" of the last text line to be drawn,
 +
in turn it causes adjustment of widget height if "ow_autoscale" is set
 +
 +
*** makes sence only if "ow_autoscale=true" & ow_autosize=false & "extraspace <> 0" ***
  
 +
ow_fontglyphheight (design-time only)
 +
- causes only interline "extraspace"-s to be drawn, opposite to "ow_fontlineheight"
  
  // enters the application event loop;
+
ow_autoscale (design-time only)
  //
+
- causes that if the contents change (design OR run-time) so that its' height changes
  // once the loop finishes, performs "OnTerminated" for all its subscribers,
+
then the widget will be v-scaled as well
  // destroys all application forms ( components & windows )
 
  procedure run;
 
  
  // TRUE if the eventloop is entered
+
ow_autosize (design-time only)
  function running: boolean;
+
- causes that widget's height & width & client area adjust so that to provide space for contents of the client area
 +
- no design-time change of height/width are possible as long as this option is in effect
  
  // returns/sets the application name
+
ow_autosizeanright
  // ( defaults to the full path to application executable in the native OS format );
+
- when autosizing & {an_right isn't set}, the design-set right margin against the parent is preserved
  // currently, only for informatiion query purposes
 
  property applicationname: msestring read fapplicationname write fapplicationname;
 
 
 
  
  // if exclusive "rights" are satisfied for the main thread ( a mutex lock is OK )  & the event loop is in progress
+
ow_autosizeanbottom
  // then posts the "event" to the main application thread for asyc processing,
+
- when autosizing & {an_bottom isn't set}, the design-set bottom margin against the parent is preserved
  // otherwise adds the event to the internal list for further handling as soon as the above conditions meet
 
  procedure postevent(event: tevent);
 
  
  // TRUE if never idle since last call,
+
optionsskin:
  // unlocks the application and calls sleep if not mainthread and asleepus >= 0
 
  function checkoverload(const asleepus: integer = 100000): boolean;
 
  
  // returns/sets the application exception handler
+
- osc_noskin
  property onexception: exceptioneventty read fonexception write fonexception;
+
- osc_framebuttononly
 +
- osc_container
  
  // if not "eabort" & no unhandled exceptions,
 
  // executes the above "OnException" code if assigned
 
  // or shows an exception message otherwise;
 
  procedure handleexception(sender: tobject = nil;
 
                                      const leadingtext: string = '');
 
  
  // synchronizes the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex),
+
Methods:
  // TRUE if the calling thread allready holds the mutex,
 
  // the mutex is recursive
 
  function lock: boolean;
 
  
  // tries to synchronize the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex)
+
  // tmsecomponent
  function trylock: boolean;
 
  
  // releases the mutex if the calling thread holds the mutex,
+
// (re)draws the widget according to the related skin if apllicable;
  // TRUE if no unlock done
+
//
  function unlock: boolean;
+
// also called internally by "loaded" procedure ( before "OnLoaded" code ),
 +
// by ShowMessage ( for the internal widgets of the message dialogue ),  
 +
// when creating tab & form & menu widgets
 +
procedure updateskin(const recursive: boolean = false);
  
  // releases the mutex recursively if the calling thread holds the mutex,
+
// TRUE if the instance is created but not yet ready
  // returns "count" for the below "relockall"
+
// for interaction & accessing data & appearance change & receiving events etc
  function unlockall: integer;
+
// ( the stage between firing "OnCreate" & "OnLoaded" )
 +
function loading: boolean;
 +
 +
{$ifdef FPC}
 +
procedure setinline(value: boolean); // ?
 +
procedure setancestor(value: boolean); // ?
 +
{$endif}
  
  // regains the mutex to serve "count" locks
+
// TRUE if all conditios are OK for executing the code of "event" ( a handler must be assigned to the event )
  procedure relockall(count: integer);
+
function canevent(const event: tmethod): boolean;
  
  // creates a syncronize event ( which will fire asyncronously then waits for another thread will allow it to finish ), assigns "proc" to it as the event handler,
 
  // then frees all locks temporarily then posts the event to the app event queue & waits fot it to be processed the resores the locks;
 
  //
 
  // TRUE if not aborted, quiet -> shows no exceptions if occurs
 
  //
 
  // the "syncronize event" is an event owning a semaphore which can be touched by another thread
 
  // thus causing "event.waitfo" to return & to exec the event handler code
 
  //
 
  function synchronize(const proc: objectprocty;
 
                      const quite: boolean = false): boolean;
 
  
  // TRUE if the calling ( this function ) thread is the application main thread
+
// Shortly, replaces the persistent storage of the widget
  function ismainthread: boolean;
+
//
 
+
// if {value <> nil} then
  // TRUE if the currently locked thread is the application main thread
+
// - if "instance" is nil then calls "createproc" to create the instance,
   function islockthread: boolean;
+
//   then assigns the instance's value:= "value"
 +
// otherwise frees "instance"
 +
procedure setoptionalobject(const value: tpersistent; var instance;
 +
                        createproc: createprocty);
  
  // waith for "athread" to terminate,
+
// creates the persistent storage of the widget via calling "createproc"
  // does "unlock-relock" around waiting
+
procedure getoptionalobject(const instance: tobject; createproc: createprocty);
  procedure waitforthread(athread: tmsethread);
 
  
  // post a "nothing-to-do" event for asynchronous processing in the main thread
+
// obtains & puts to "obj" a CORBA interface entry for "aintf" (GUID,...)
  procedure wakeupmainthread;
+
function getcorbainterface(const aintf: ptypeinfo; out obj) : boolean;
  
  // invalidates all registered forms of the application so that their widgets redraw land-specific captions
+
        // TRUE if the widget is owned, or "self" otherwise
  // ( changed by "mseconsts.setlangconsts" ),
+
function checkowned(component: tcomponent): boolean;  
  // called internally in "setlangconsts" before return
 
  procedure langchanged; virtual;
 
  
  // returns/sets "aps_terminated" state flag ( no actions ? )
+
        // TRUE if the widget is owner, or "self" otherwise
  // this flag is also set internally by "terminate" if not cancelled
+
function checkowner(component: tcomponent): boolean;  
  property terminated: boolean read getterminated write setterminated;
 
  
  // returns the number of "handleexception" calls having an effect ( a message or the handler code )
+
// return the top-most widget in owner chain starting from this widget
  property exceptioncount: longword read fexceptioncount;
+
function rootowner: tcomponent;
  
 +
// return the array of owning widgets starting from this widget
 +
// componentarty[0] is the widget oneself
 +
function getrootcomponentpath: componentarty;
  
private
+
        // returns items of objeclinker ( which notify this widget )
// function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;
+
        // and free notify list ( which are notified by this widget ),
 +
        // duplicates are removed.
 +
        //
 +
        // Notifies mainly relate to insertion/removal operation on widgets
 +
        // The notify list is maintained by FreeNotification & RemoveFreeNotification
 +
function linkedobjects: objectarty;
  
<pre/>
+
// sends "event" recursively to child widgets until no more children or
 +
// the event is processed ( cea_processed ) by one of the children,
 +
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
 +
procedure sendcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
 +
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
  
== DB ==
+
// sends "event" to each of owning widgets downward from the root owner,
 +
// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
 +
procedure sendrootcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
 +
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);
  
=== DBedit ===
+
// posts an async "atag"-ged event to be handled by oneself
=== DBfields ===
+
procedure asyncevent(atag: integer = 0);
=== TDBwidgetgrid ===
 
<pre>
 
  Properties:
 
  
        anchors - ...
+
// posts a "tcomponentevent" instance from sender=self,
bounds - ...
+
// "kind" is defined when creating the event,
 +
// and "tag" may be adjusted after creation
 +
procedure postcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent);
  
color
+
// returns the classname of the widget if the widget is toplevel,
- color of the grid's client area
+
// and "tmsecomponent" otherwise )
cursor
+
property moduleclassname: string read getmoduleclassname;
- cursor shape when the mouse is over the client area
 
  
datacols
+
// returns the classname of the widget as the entry of its constructor
colorselect
+
// ( button => tbutton, datamodule => tdm1mo, form => ttstfo, dbstringedit => tdbstringedit,.. )
linecolor
+
property actualclassname: string read getactualclassname;
linecolorfix
+
 
linewidth
+
// returns "fmsecomponentstate"
newrowcol
+
// ( a set of cs_ismodule,cs_endreadproc,cs_loadedproc,cs_noload, cs_hasskin,cs_noskin )
 +
property msecomponentstate: msecomponentstatesty read fmsecomponentstate;
 +
 
 +
// returns/sets a pointer associated with the widget
 +
// ( contrary to the integer "tag", allows to use an arbitary data type
 +
// for associating data )
 +
property tagpo: pointer read ftagpo write ftagpo;
 +
 
 +
// returns/sets a string identifying the widget in the help system
 +
property helpcontext: msestring read gethelpcontext write fhelpcontext;
 +
 
 +
// twidget
  
options
+
// creates an instance of the widget, owned by "aowner" if not NIL
co_readonly
+
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
co_nofocus
+
 
co_invisible
+
destructor destroy; override;
co_disabled
+
 
co_drawfocus
+
// ??
co_mousemovefocus
+
procedure afterconstruction; override;
co_lefbuttonfocusonly
+
 
co_focusselect
+
// rescales the widget frame ( if assigned ) then owned widgets ( if exist, recursively ) then bounds_* then the font ( if assigned )
co_mouseselect
+
// called before inserting in parentwidget,
co_keyselect
+
// calls "scale(ascale)",
co_multiselect
+
// no visual repainting
co_resetselectionexit
+
procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); virtual;
co_rowselect
 
co_fixwidth
 
co_fixpos
 
co_fill
 
co_proportional
 
co_nohscroll
 
co_savevalue
 
co_savestate
 
co_rowfont
 
co_rowcolor
 
co_zebracolor
 
co_nosort
 
co_sortdescent
 
co_norearrange
 
co_cancopy
 
co_canpaste
 
co_mousescrollrow
 
co_rowdatachange
 
  
sortcol
+
// restores the "fontheight" to "font.glyphheight" if "ow_fontglyphheight" or
width
+
// to "font.lineheight" if "ow_fontlineheight" otherwise,
 +
// ascale is ignored ?
 +
// calls "synctofontheight->setfontheight",
 +
// called after inserting in parentwidget,
 +
// no visual repainting
 +
procedure initnewwidget(const ascale: real); virtual;
 +
 
 +
// creates the widget frame if not yet created
 +
procedure createframe;
 +
 
 +
// creates the widget face if not yet  created
 +
procedure createface;
 +
 
 +
// creates the widget font if not yet  created
 +
procedure createfont;
 +
 
 +
// checks ws_loadlock and csdestroing too
 +
function isloading: boolean;
 +
 
 +
// returns "widgetstatety" - a set of (
 +
// ws_visible,ws_enabled,ws_active,ws_entered,ws_entering,ws_exiting,
 +
// ws_focused,ws_mouseinclient,ws_wantmousebutton,ws_wantmousemove,
 +
// ws_wantmousefocus,ws_iswidget,ws_opaque,ws_nopaint,
 +
// ws_clicked,ws_mousecaptured,ws_clientmousecaptured,
 +
// ws_loadlock,ws_loadedproc,ws_showproc,ws_minclientsizevalid,
 +
// ws_showed,ws_hidden, //used in tcustomeventwidget
 +
// ws_destroying,ws_staticframe,ws_staticface,ws_isvisible
 +
//
 +
// iframe
 +
function widgetstate: widgetstatesty;
 +
 
 +
// returns "widgetstate1ty" - a set of (
 +
// (ws1_childscaled,ws1_fontheightlock,
 +
// ws1_widgetregionvalid,ws1_rootvalid,
 +
// ws1_anchorsizing,ws1_isstreamed,
 +
// ws1_scaled, //used in tcustomscalingwidget
 +
// ws1_noclipchildren,
 +
// ws1_nodesignvisible,ws1_nodesignframe,ws1_nodesignhandles,
 +
// ws1_nodesigndelete,ws1_designactive,
 +
// ws1_fakevisible,ws1_nominsize //used for report size calculations
 +
// )
 +
property widgetstate1: widgetstates1ty read fwidgetstate1;
 +
 +
* this set of states is needed because the max FPC set size is 32
 +
  thus "widgetstate1ty" can't fit all states
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if the widget is contained within another widget
 +
// ( tcomponent stuff )
 +
function hasparent: boolean; override;             
 +
 
 +
// returns the parent component if it's a widget or the grandparent otherwise
 +
function getparentcomponent: tcomponent; override;  // tcomponent
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if "awidget" is an ascendant or the widget or they are the same widget
 +
function checkdescendent(awidget: twidget): boolean;
 +
 +
// TRUE if app is running and the widget owns the caret or the caret widget
 +
function hascaret: boolean;
 +
 
 +
        // TRUE if "winid" allocated and not loading and not destroying,
 +
        // all widgets on a form have "winid" of this form ( a real window allocated by the OS )
 +
        // thus have this function TRUE
 +
function windowallocated: boolean;
 +
 
 +
// TRUE if presents a valid toplevelwindow with assigned "winid"
 +
function ownswindow: boolean;
 +
 
 +
// invalidated area of the widget, the origin is "clientpos" against the roor widget
 +
function updaterect: rectty;
 +
 
 +
// calls recursively "canclose" for all contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded! ),
 +
// TRUE if none of the widgets return FALSE
 +
//
 +
// more specialized widgets may have "canclose" overridden
 +
// to perform more work than just this call recursion
 +
// ( not null or range check,.. )
 +
//
 +
// "onclosequery" must also pass the check if assigned, for the function to succeed
 +
function canclose(const newfocus: twidget = nil): boolean; virtual;
 +
 
 +
        // checks "canclose" first for focused widget of the window ( form,.. )
 +
        // if it is a descendant of the widget or the widget oneself,
 +
        // then continues with subwidgets of the widget;
 +
        // also - finishes editing ( snapshots "value" ) in the focused widget before checking
 +
function canparentclose(const newfocus: twidget): boolean; overload;
 +
 
 +
// the above function but with the preserved focus
 +
function canparentclose: boolean; overload;
 +
                  //newfocus = window.focusedwidget     
 +
 
 +
function canfocus: boolean; virtual;
 +
function setfocus(aactivate: boolean = true): boolean; virtual;//true if ok
 +
procedure nextfocus; //sets inputfocus to then next appropriate widget
 +
 
 +
function findtabfocus(const ataborder: integer): twidget;
 +
                      //nil if cannot focus
 +
 
 +
function firsttabfocus: twidget;
 +
function lasttabfocus: twidget;
 +
function nexttaborder(const down: boolean = false): twidget;
 +
 
 +
function focusback(const aactivate: boolean = true): boolean;
 +
                              //false if focus not changed
 +
 
 +
function parentcolor: colorty;
 +
function actualcolor: colorty; virtual;
 +
function actualopaquecolor: colorty;
 +
function backgroundcolor: colorty;
 +
function translatecolor(const acolor: colorty): colorty;
 +
 
 +
procedure widgetevent(const event: twidgetevent); virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure sendwidgetevent(const event: twidgetevent);
 +
                              //event will be destroyed
 +
 
 +
procedure release; override;
 +
 
 +
function show(const modal: boolean = false; const transientfor: twindow = nil): modalresultty; virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure hide;
 +
procedure activate(const abringtofront: boolean = true); virtual;
 +
                            //show and setfocus
 +
 
 +
procedure bringtofront;
 +
procedure sendtoback;
 +
procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twidget);
 +
 
 +
procedure paint(const canvas: tcanvas); virtual;
 +
procedure update; virtual;
 +
procedure scrollwidgets(const dist: pointty);
 +
 
 +
procedure scrollrect(const dist: pointty; const rect: rectty; scrollcaret: boolean);
 +
                            //origin = paintrect.pos
 +
 
 +
procedure scroll(const dist: pointty);
 +
                            //scrolls paintrect and widgets
 +
 
 +
procedure getcaret;
 +
procedure scrollcaret(const dist: pointty);
 +
function mousecaptured: boolean;
 +
procedure capturemouse(grab: boolean = true);
 +
procedure releasemouse;
 +
procedure capturekeyboard;
 +
procedure releasekeyboard;
 +
procedure synctofontheight; virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure dragevent(var info: draginfoty); virtual;
 +
procedure dochildscaled(const sender: twidget); virtual;
 +
 
 +
procedure invalidatewidget;    //invalidates whole widget
 +
procedure invalidate;          //invalidates clientrect
 +
procedure invalidaterect(const rect: rectty; org: originty = org_client);
 +
procedure invalidateframestate;
 +
 
 +
procedure invalidateframestaterect(const rect: rectty;
 +
                                        const org: originty = org_client); 
 +
function hasoverlappingsiblings(arect: rectty): boolean; //origin = pos
 +
 
 +
function window: twindow;
 +
function rootwidget: twidget;
 +
 
 +
function parentofcontainer: twidget;
 +
            //parentwidget.parentwidget if parentwidget has not ws_iswidget,
 +
            //parentwidget otherwise
 +
 
 +
property parentwidget: twidget read fparentwidget write setparentwidget;
 +
function getrootwidgetpath: widgetarty; //root widget is last
 +
 
 +
// number of contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded ! )
 +
function widgetcount: integer;
 +
 
 +
function parentwidgetindex: integer; //index in parentwidget.widgets, -1 if none
 +
property widgets[const index: integer]: twidget read getwidgets;
 +
function widgetatpos(var info: widgetatposinfoty): twidget; overload;
 +
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty): twidget; overload;
 +
 
 +
function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty;
 +
                  const state: widgetstatesty): twidget; overload;
 +
 
 +
property taborderedwidgets: widgetarty read gettaborderedwidgets;
 +
 
 +
function findtagwidget(const atag: integer; const aclass: widgetclassty): twidget;
 +
              //returns first matching descendent
 +
 
 +
property container: twidget read getcontainer;
 +
function containeroffset: pointty;
 +
function childrencount: integer; virtual;
 +
property children[const index: integer]: twidget read getchildwidgets; default;
 +
 
 +
function childatpos(const pos: pointty;
 +
                  const clientorigin: boolean = true): twidget; virtual;
 +
 
 +
function getsortxchildren: widgetarty;
 +
function getsortychildren: widgetarty;
 +
property focusedchild: twidget read ffocusedchild;
 +
property focusedchildbefore: twidget read ffocusedchildbefore;
 +
 
 +
function mouseeventwidget(const info: mouseeventinfoty): twidget;
 +
 
 +
function checkdescendent(widget: twidget): boolean;
 +
                    //true if widget is descendent or self
 +
 
 +
function checkancestor(widget: twidget): boolean;
 +
                    //true if widget is ancestor or self
 +
 
 +
function containswidget(awidget: twidget): boolean;
 +
 
 +
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget); overload;
 +
 
 +
procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget; const apos: pointty); overload; virtual;
 +
                //widget can be child
 +
 
 +
function iswidgetclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty; const caption: boolean = false): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
 +
//or in frame.caption if caption = true, origin = pos
 +
 
 +
function isclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
 +
 
 +
function isdblclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
 +
// and timedlay to last buttonpress is short
 +
 
 +
function isdblclicked(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype in [et_buttonpress,et_butonrelease], button is mb_left,
 +
// and timedlay to last same buttonevent is short
 +
 
 +
function isleftbuttondown(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
 +
//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
 +
//origin = paintrect.pos
 +
 
 +
widgetrect: the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
paintrect: the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
clientrect: virtual area which
 +
- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
 +
- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect",
 +
  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
 +
 +
// the coord of outer top-left corner against the toplevel form = the window owner,
 +
// including the frame & frame caption
 +
function rootpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
// the coord of the outer top-left corner against the screen ( the WM decorations aren't counted in )
 +
// includes the frame & frame caption
 +
property screenpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
//  the coord of the outer top-left corner against the parent widget,
 +
// including the frame & frame caption
 +
property widgetrect: rectty;
 +
property pos: pointty; // =widgetrect.pos
 +
property size: sizety; // =widgetrect.size
 +
property left: integer; // =bounds_x
 +
property right: integer; //widgetrect.x + widgetrect.cx, sets cx;
 +
property top: integer;  // =bounds_y
 +
property bottom: integer; //widgetrect.y + widgetrect.cy, sets cy;
 +
property width: integer; // =bounds_cx
 +
property height: integer; // =bounds_cy
 +
function widgetsizerect: rectty;          //pos = nullpoint
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
 +
    //  except the frame & frame caption
 +
function paintrect: rectty;
 +
function paintpos: pointty;
 +
function paintsize: sizety;
 +
function innerpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
 +
function clientwidgetrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
 +
function clientwidgetpos: pointty;
 +
function clippedpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to  but clipped by all parentpaintrects
 +
function innerwidgetrect: rectty;    // mainly equals to paintrect
 +
function innerclientwidgetpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
 +
    //  except the frame caption
 +
function framerect: rectty; // =paintrect except the frame caption area
 +
function framepos: pointty;
 +
function framesize: sizety;
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the client area ( clientrect )  against the paint area ( paintrect )
 +
    //  usually these areas match
 +
function clientrect: rectty;
 +
property clientsize: sizety;
 +
property clientwidth: integer;
 +
property clientheight: integer;
 +
property clientpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
 +
function paintrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the client area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
 +
function clientrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,
 +
 
 +
// the coord of the inner area against the client area ( clientrect )
 +
function innerclientrect: rectty;  // mainly equals to clientrect
 +
function innerclientsize: sizety;
 +
function innerclientpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
function framewidth: sizety;              //widgetrect.size - paintrect.size
 +
function clientframewidth: sizety;        //widgetrect.size - clientrect.size
 +
function innerclientframewidth: sizety;  //widgetrect.size - innerclientrect.size
 +
function innerframewidth: sizety;        //clientrect.size - innerclientrect.size 
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the paint area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
 +
function paintparentpos: pointty;    //origin = parentwidget.pos
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the client area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
 +
function clientparentpos: pointty;  //origin = parentwidget.pos
 +
 
 +
    // the coord of the widgetrect(pos) against the client area of parent
 +
property parentclientpos: pointty;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
function clientpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
function widgetpostoclientpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
function widgetpostopaintpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
function paintpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
 +
procedure scale(const ascale: real); virtual;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
property minsize: sizety read fminsize write setminsize;
 +
property maxsize: sizety read fmaxsize write setmaxsize;
 +
function maxclientsize: sizety; virtual;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
property anchors: anchorsty read fanchors write setanchors default defaultanchors;
 +
property defaultfocuschild: twidget read getdefaultfocuschild write setdefaultfocuschild;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
procedure changeclientsize(const delta: sizety); //asynchronous
 +
 
 +
function getcanvas(aorigin: originty = org_client): tcanvas;
 +
 
 +
function showing: boolean;
 +
              //true if self and all ancestors visible and window allocated
 +
 
 +
function isenabled: boolean;
 +
              //true if self and all ancestors enabled
 +
 
 +
function active: boolean;
 +
function entered: boolean;
 +
 
 +
function activeentered: boolean;
 +
//true if entered and window is regularactivewindow or inactivated
 +
 
 +
function focused: boolean;
 +
function clicked: boolean;
 +
 
 +
function indexofwidget(const awidget: twidget): integer;
 +
 
 +
procedure changedirection(const avalue: graphicdirectionty;
 +
                                            var dest: graphicdirectionty); virtual;
 +
 
 +
// (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally within the parent's client area
 +
// so that awidget[i] were placed next each other
 +
// at h-space dist[i], starting from "startx" with the right margin "endmargin";
 +
//
 +
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining h-spaces are taken
 +
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
 +
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
 +
//
 +
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to h-resize to provide the margin :
 +
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_left,an_right] set then the first of such is resized
 +
//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is h-resized
 +
//
 +
procedure placexorder(
 +
const startx: integer;
 +
const dist: array of integer;
 +
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 +
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 +
 
 +
// (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area
 +
// so that awidget[i] were placed upper/lower each other
 +
// at v-space dist[i], starting from "starty" with the bottom margin "endmargin";
 +
//
 +
// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining v-spaces are taken
 +
// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
 +
// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
 +
//
 +
// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to v-resize to provide the margin :
 +
//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_top,an_bottom] set then the first of such is resized
 +
//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is v-resized
 +
//
 +
procedure placeyorder(
 +
const starty: integer;
 +
const dist: array of integer;
 +
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
 +
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
 +
              //origin = clientpos, endmargin by size adjust of widgets
 +
              //with [an_top,an_bottom], minint -> no change
 +
 
 +
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally  within the parent's client area so that
 +
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
 +
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_left" set ) so that they right borders match the right border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_right" set ) so that they left borders match the left border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they Y-axes match the Y-axe of awidgets[0]
 +
//
 +
// mainly applicable for v-stacked widgets since h-stacked may overlap after such alignment
 +
//
 +
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
 +
function alignx(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 +
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area so that
 +
// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
 +
// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_top" set ) so that they bottom borders match the bottom border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_bottom" set ) so that they top borders match the top border of awidgets[0]
 +
// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they X-axes match the X-axe of awidgets[0]
 +
//
 +
// mainly applicable for h-stacked widgets since v-stacked may overlap after such alignment
 +
//
 +
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
 +
function aligny(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
 +
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;
 +
 
 +
function actualcursor: cursorshapety; virtual;
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Event handlers:
 +
 
 +
- onactivate
 +
 
 +
fires :
 +
 
 +
= on receiving input focus, just before "OnFocus"
 +
 +
= forms specific :
 +
* on 1-st display of the form after "OnLoaded" ( from "Loaded" procedure)
 +
* on switch back from another apllication/WM ( "oe_activate" event )
 +
* after closure of a descendant form
 +
* on minimizing/maximizing the form
 +
 
 +
- onchildscaled
 +
 
 +
fires :
 +
 
 +
= on child/children resizing due to font height change
 +
 
 +
= form widget: once "form.container" {scrolling widget} is loaded
 +
 
 +
- ondeactivate
 +
fires
 +
= form widget: when the form looses input focus
 +
= non-form widget: when the widget looses input focus
 +
 
 +
- ondefocus
 +
 
 +
fires
 +
= on disabling the widget
 +
 
 +
= form widget: if another form is focused
 +
= non-form widget: if another widget is focused
 +
 
 +
- onenter
 +
= fires on any way of taking parent-wide focus as soon as
 +
the parent stores the new child's order, before "OnActivate" & "OnFocus"
 +
 
 +
- onexit
 +
= fires last on parent-wide lossing focus, after "OnDefocus" & "OnDeactivate"
 +
= for top-level ( not in a container ) forms, doesn't fire
 +
 
 +
- onfocus
 +
fires
 +
= once the existing widget takes the focus
 +
= on showing the widget's form if the widget has the lowest "TabOrder"
 +
 
 +
- onfontheightdelta
 +
fires
 +
= if [ow_fontglyphheight OR ow_fontlineheight ] AND {the
 +
new font height differs from the previos one}
 +
= before the parent redraws this widget
 +
 
 +
- onpopup
 +
fires :
 +
= on calling a popup-menu ( with "RightClick" ), once the menu items of the current level are loaded
 +
( before building the submenus )
 +
 
 +
- onresize
 +
 
 +
= fires on creating/(changing size)/(min-max restoring) of widget,
 +
before actual redrawing
 +
 
 +
= rechecks if there's real work to do
 +
 
 +
- onshowhint
 +
= fires when a installed hint is activated or on "aplication.showint" called
 +
= since called last, allows to adjust the default behavior
 +
 
 +
- onbeforeupdateskin
 +
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) before applying the skin
 +
 
 +
- onafterupdateskin
 +
= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) once the skin is applied
 +
 
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
=== TWidget stuff ===
 +
<pre>
 +
  Properties:   
 +
- name
 +
- anchors
 +
- bounds
 +
- color
 +
- enabled
 +
- visible
 +
- <face> : see {any face}
 +
- <frame> : see {any frame}
 +
    - hint
 +
    - helpcontext
 +
    - tag
 +
    - taborder
 +
    - cursor
 +
    - optionswidget
 +
    - optionsskin
 +
    - popupmenu
 +
   
 +
twidget's event handlers:
 +
   
 +
- on(de)activate
 +
- onbeforeupdateskin
 +
- onafterupdateskin
 +
- onchildscaled
 +
- onfontheightdelta
 +
- on(de)focus
 +
- onenter
 +
- onmove
 +
- onpopup
 +
- onresize
 +
- onshowhint
 +
     
 +
align_glue :
 +
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the align mode )
 +
- wam_none
 +
- wam_start
 +
- wan_center
 +
- wm_end
 +
 
 +
align_leader :
 +
the widget ( incl another spacer, splitter or layouter ) against which the alignment applies ( the reference widget )
 +
 
 +
align_mode :
 +
  ( inner anchoring mode within widget group, in the align mode )
 +
- wam_none
 +
- wam_start
 +
- wan_center
 +
- wm_end
 +
 
 +
// Place mode:
 +
 
 +
     
 +
place_mindist, place_maxdist:
 +
- in the place(ment) mode, limits distance between widgets
 +
  ( these distance once calculated also define side margins if applicable )
 +
 
 +
place_mode:
 +
  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the place mode )
 +
- wam_none
 +
- wam_start
 +
- wan_center
 +
- wm_end
 +
 
 +
place_options:
 +
- plo_endmargin
 +
= to resize a widget so that it "eats" extra space if it occurs
 +
 +
* only applicable in the place mode, with a limiting value of "place_maxdist" and:
 +
 
 +
  1) {place_mode <> wam_none}
 +
or
 +
  2) {place_mode = wam_end} and {plo_propmargin in place_options}
 +
 
 +
For the exact look, see above
 +
 
 +
 
 +
- plo_propmargin
 +
= виджеты расставляются теснее так, чтобы образовались отступы перед и после,
 +
  причем расстояние между центрами виджетов было бы таким же,
 +
  как и растояние между серединами крайних виджетов и соотв. границами зоны расстановки
 +
 
 +
- plo_syncmaxautosize
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
- plo_synccaptiondistx
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
  * affects widgets with opposite cp_left/right set as well
 +
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" among all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
 +
              * don't set cfo_captiondistouter here !
 +
 
 +
- plo_synccaptiondisty
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
  * affects also widgets with opposite cp_top/bottom set
 +
  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
 +
 
 +
              ! here, don't set "cfo_captiondistouter" for affected widgets !
 +
 
 +
- plo_syncpaintwidth
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
- plo_syncpaintheight
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
- plo_scalesize
 +
= see above
 +
 
 +
 
 +
dist_left, dist_right, dist_top, dist_bottom :
 +
= margins between most outer edge the layouter and
 +
  the corresponding linked widget
 +
 
 +
* see "tspacer" for detail
 +
 
 +
linkleft,linkright,linktop,linkbottom : see "tspacer"
 +
 
 +
options:
 +
- spao_glueright, spao_gluebottom:
 +
= set the adjustment dependencies between the layouter and its link_* widgets
 +
 
 +
* see "tspacer" for more details
 +
 
 +
// which mode of widget placement to apply - see above
 +
optionslayout:
 +
- lao_alignx
 +
- lao_aligny
 +
- lao_placex
 +
- lao_placey
 +
- lao_scalewidth
 +
- lao_scaleheight
 +
- lao_scaleleft
 +
- lao_scaletop
 +
 +
* lao_place* & lao_align* can't be combined for one direction
 +
 
 +
optionsscale:
 +
 
 +
  * cause the layouter to provide full space for the widgets as long as they expand/shrink/move
 +
 
 +
- osc_expandx
 +
= allocates more h-space if needed
 +
 
 +
- osc_shrinkx
 +
= removes extra h-space if occurred
 +
 
 +
- osc_expandy
 +
= allocates more v-space if needed
 +
 
 +
- osc_shrinky
 +
= removes extra v-space if occurred
 +
 
 +
- osc_invisishrinkx
 +
= fully h-collapses the layouter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
 +
 
 +
- osc_invisishrinky
 +
= fully v-collapses the layoter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )
 +
 
 +
optionsskin:
 +
= see <any widget>
 +
 
 +
 
 +
Methods:
 +
 
 +
constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;
 +
</pre>
 +
 
 +
=== Public stuff ===
 +
<pre>
 +
(f)window:
 +
the OS-allocated ( root = toplevel ) window common for all widgets of this window
 +
 +
* "widget.fwindow.fowner = widget.self" in case of the widget present the root "fwindow"
 +
  ( owns the window )
 +
 
 +
(f)rootpos:
 +
position of the widget in the coord of toplevel window not the nearest parent widget alone,
 +
calculated as sum of such positions ( fwidgetrect.pos ) starting from the toplevel through the
 +
                chain of all parents up to the current widget;
 +
"nullpoint" (0,0) for toplevel widgets ( window-owning forms,..)
 +
 
 +
screenpos:
 +
- coord aginst the top-left corner of screen
 +
- WM decoration & title aren't parts of the widget !
 +
 
 +
widgetrect:
 +
the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
paintrect:
 +
the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption
 +
 
 +
clientrect:
 +
virtual area which
 +
- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
 +
- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect",
 +
  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
 +
 
 +
* "t*grid" aren't such scrollable widgets since their virtual height would be limited by
 +
  the X11 "+-32000" limitation,
 +
  so example of such widgets are tscrollbox, "tform.container" etc
 +
 
 +
framerect:
 +
the widget on-screen area except its frame caption but including inner & outer frame
 +
 
 +
****************
 +
 
 +
// releases all thread locks then post the event to the app event queue and
 +
// waits for the event handler finishes ( signalled by "sye_ok on a semaphore )
 +
// finally restores the locks
 +
    // true if the handler is not aborted
 +
function synchronizeevent(const aevent: tsynchronizeevent): boolean;
 +
 
 +
    // translates "point" coord against "source" widgetrect to "dest" widgetrect
 +
//
 +
//  * nil "source" = from screen coord
 +
//  * nil "dest" = to screen coord
 +
procedure translatewidgetpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);
 +
 
 +
// the function-framed version of "translatewidgetpoint1"
 +
function translatewidgetpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;
 +
 
 +
// rect isntead of point,
 +
// if dest = nil then to screen
 +
    // if source = nil then against screen
 +
function translatewidgetrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
 +
//-----------------
 +
    // translates "point" coord against "source" paintrect to "dest" paintrect
 +
//  * nil "source" = from screen coord
 +
//  * nil "dest" = to screen coord
 +
procedure translatepaintpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);
 +
 
 +
// the function-framed version of "translatepaintpoint1"
 +
function translatepaintpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;
 +
 
 +
// rect isntead of point,
 +
// if dest = nil then to screen
 +
    // if source = nil then against screen
 +
function translatepaintrect(const rect: rectty;const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
 +
    //-----------------
 +
    // translates "point" coord against "source" clientrect to "dest" clienttrect
 +
//  * nil "source" = from screen coord
 +
//  * nil "dest" = to screen coord
 +
procedure translateclientpoint1(var point: pointty;
 +
                    const source,dest: twidget);
 +
 
 +
// the function-framed version of "translateclientpoint1"
 +
function translateclientpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;
 +
 
 +
// rect isntead of point,
 +
// if dest = nil then to screen
 +
    // if source = nil then against screen
 +
function translateclientrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
 +
    //-----------------
 +
 
 +
// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.x" coords
 +
//  - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
 +
//  - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
 +
procedure sortwidgetsxorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);
 +
 
 +
// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.y" coords
 +
//  - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
 +
//  - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
 +
procedure sortwidgetsyorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);
 +
 
 +
// for each  of "widgets", calculates its autosized client area ( min size rect to fit the caption, etc )
 +
    //  - both hor & ver sizes of client area of each of "widgets" are adjusted to the max of the above calculated areas,
 +
//   as the result - client areas of all widgets become identically v+h sized
 +
    //
 +
    //  * right & bottom anchored margins of each widget are preserved
 +
procedure syncmaxautosize(const widgets: array of twidget);
 +
 
 +
// for each  of "widgets", width of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that
 +
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) widths of all widgets become identical
 +
    // to the external widht of the widest widget
 +
    //   
 +
    //  * if "awidth" >= 0 then no determining the widest widget is taken and
 +
    //    "awidth" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
 +
    //  * right anchored margins of each widget are lost
 +
procedure syncminframewidth(const awidgets: array of twidget;
 +
                              const awidth: integer = -1);
 +
 
 +
// for each  of "widgets", height of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that
 +
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) heights of all widgets become identical
 +
    // to the external height of the highest widget
 +
    //   
 +
    //  * if "aheight" >= 0 then no determining the highest widget is taken and
 +
    //    "aheight" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
 +
    //  * bottom anchored margins of each widget are lost
 +
procedure syncminframeheight(const awidgets: array of twidget; const aheight: integer = -1);
 +
</pre>
  
items[N]
+
== Projects using MSEgui ==
color
 
colorselect
 
datalist - ???
 
face - see <any face>
 
fontselect - see <any font>
 
frame - see <any frame>
 
linecolor
 
linecolorfix
 
linewidth
 
name
 
 
options
 
 
<pre/>
 
=== Report ===
 
  
==== TRepSpacer ====
+
* [[Projects using MSEgui]]
==== TRecordBand ====
 
==== TrepValueDisp ====
 
==== TRepPageNumdisp ====
 
==== TRepPrintDateDisp ====
 
==== TBandGroup ====
 
==== TTileArea ====
 
 
 
== Design ==
 
 
 
=== TGdbMi ===
 
=== TSyntaxEdit ===
 
=== TSyntaxPainter ===
 
 
 
== Comm ==
 
 
 
=== TCommPort ===
 
=== TAsciiCommPort ===
 
=== TAsciiProtPort ===
 
=== TCommSelector ===
 

Latest revision as of 00:07, 10 April 2021

English (en)

Widgets

TSimpleWidget

see also Reference:_MSEgui/TSimpleWidget

TMainMenuWidget

TSimpleWidget

TMseFormWidget

Use it in order to insert a tcustomform descendant into another widget at designtime. Does not try to load resources in "create".

        tmseform descendants ( MainForm, SimpleForm,.. )

	Client area of the form & parent of its widgets ( against which the widgets 
	are placed and colored ) is presented by the "container" property 
	not "container.frame.clientarea"

	CanClose is called :

		- on receiving "ek_close" by window
		- for modal window, on focus change

		- within parent window's "CanClose"	where all nested windows are  
		checked for OnCloseQuery & OnClose - if any sets "mr_none" then the parent window 
		can't close as well
			
		- from nested window's "CanParentClose"
		- from own "CanParentClose"

		- some componnets build oneself in own "Loaded" procedure :
			= widget grids
			= database access components
			= ...

	The "form.show" has parameter "transientfor".
	The window Z-order is above the "transientfor" window. The exact behaviour
	depends on the window manager.
        
        caption
		- run-time caption on the title bar

	color
		- color behind the client ( contaner ) area

	container
		- the real parent of form's widgets, <see "tformscrollbox">

	cursor
		- the mouse over cursor shape

	enabled - "false" disables all child widgets

	face
		<see "tfacecomp"> + some more options

	font
		<see "tfont">

	frame
		<see "tframecomp"> + some more options
		
	icon 
		<see "timage">

	mainmenu
		<see tmainmenu>

	name
		- name to refer when programming

	options:

		fo_main 
			- assigns this from as the aplication GUI-face & event receiver
			- causes the icon of this form to be icon of the application 

		fo_terminateonclose
			- causes the application to terminate once the form has closed ( doesn't depend on "fo_main" )


		fo_freeonclose
			- causes the form (even being modal) to release its memory on closure or OK-return from "CanClose"

		fo_defaultpos
			- lets the WM to position the form initially

		fo_screencentered
			- causes the form initially to show in center of the apllication work area

		fo_closeonesc
			- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_ESCAPE & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_cancelonesc
			- causes the form to close on "Esc" key pressed ( with MR_CANCEL & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_closeonenter
			- causes the form to close on "Enter" key pressed ( with MR_OK & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_closeonf10
			- causes the form to close on "F10" key pressed ( with MR_F10 & "OnCloseQuery" firing )

		fo_globalshortcuts
			- allows on-this-form "ao_globalshortcut" actions to trigger

			  Notes :
				= shortcuts for modal not "fo_localshortcut" forms are processed by app
				= shortcuts for "fo_globalshorcut" forms are processed by the owning window 

		fo_localshortcuts
			- disables triggering shortcuts of on-this-form actions

		fo_autoreadstat
			- for "cs_ismodule" forms, before "OnLoaded" fires, rereads all statvars from the bound stafile/memorystream

		fo_autowritestat
			- in "CanClose", after "OnClose" fires [ and before app termination for "fo_terminateonlose" form ], 
			rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
			- for datamodules, does this before "OnDestroy" fires

		fo_savepos
			- saves/restores Z-order, size & scree coordinates of the form 
			as soon as the stat data are ready

		fo_savestate
			- for top-level form, saves/restores "VSize", "Active" & "Visible" 
			as soon as the stat data are ready

	optionswidget
		<see "any widget">
	optionswindow
		<see "any window">
	popupmenu
		<see "tpopupmenu">
	stafile
		<see "tstafile">
	stavarname
	taborder
	tag

	visible - for a form, only affects its childs widgets

	Events:

		activate = to set focused & redraw the invalidated area

		oncreate
			- fires before "Loaded" procedure is called
			- fires after creating the widget & its subwidgets but before the final arrangement
			- forms arent' yet visible on return

		  Since "Loaded" procedure hasn't yet worked at this point then 
			database contents, values of widget grid's subwidgets 
			are invalid in this event ***

		onloaded
			- fires once "Loaded" procedure of owns & all form's widgets finishes
			- processed  after "OnCreate"
			- on finishing, forms aren't yet visible

		oneventloopstart ( main forms only )
			- only applicable to main forms
			- fires once all application GUI is built and shown 
			( and ready to user's interaction )
			
		onactivate 
			- see {any_widget.OnActivate}

		onenter
			= see {any_widget.OnEnter}

		onfocus
			- see {any_widget.OnFocus}
			

		onwindowactivechanged
			- fires on :
				= touching another window even on clicking in a behind-modal window ( or its title bar )
				= 1-st showing the window
				- reactivating the window

		onbeforepaint
			- fires at the very beginning of "paint", before drawing canvas

		onpaint
			- fires in "paint" procedure, between drawing canvas and contained widgets

		onafterpaint (doafterpaint)
			- fires just on return from "paint" procedure

        	onapplicationactivechanged 
			- fires :
				= if the application gets/looses input focus

		onasyncevent (doasyncevent)
			- fires on calling {this_form}.asyncevent(atag) from any place of the application
			once delivered by the app even queue

			 "atag" set by caller(s) helps to branch within "onasyncevent", to identify the caller, etc ***
			 generally, doesn't fire instantly because these events are delivered through the app event queue ***


		onchildmouseevent
			- fires on any mouse activity over its child widget(s) not the (containing) widget oneself

		      for forms, it even fires on enetering "container" therefore it appears as if to be the form itself ***

		onchildscaled
			- see {any_widget.OnChildScaled}

		onclientmouseevent
			- fires on any mouse activity over areas expecting user's mouse input (not titlebars/frames/...)

		onclose
			- fires in "CanClose" if "modalresult <> mr_none"

		onclosequery
			- fires in "CanClose" before "OnClose"
			- "mr_none" set on return prevents the window (and its parent) from closing 
			( "OnClose" is also bypassed )


		ondeactivate
			- see {any_widget.OnDeactivate}

		ondefocus
			- see {any_widget.OnDeFocus}
			
		ondestroy
			- fires on in-code calling "BeforeDestruction"

		ondestroyed
			- fires on return from the form's destructor ( when all resources are freed )

		onterminatequery
			- fires on an attempt to terminate the app
			- by setting "var terminate:= false", allows to cancel termination 

			 Termination by debugger/OS facilities can't be blocked this way ( win32 )***

		onterminated
			- fires for not-yet-destroyed forms, once the app event loop finishes 
			- may be caused by any closure of the main app form 
			( app termination, WM/OS facilities, )


		onwindowdestroyed
			- fires once a descendant window is destroyed 
			( for a main form, when a modal simple form is closed by any way,.. )

		onevent
			- fires on receiving an event 
				= for simple forms, it's only "ek_loaded"

			There can be more if the form is connected to object_event sending
			components or if the application uses object events, for example by calling
			tguicomponent.postcomponentevent. ****

		onexit
			- see {any_widget.OnExit}

		onfocusedwidgetchanged
			- for a "prev-new" parent-wide focused wigdets pair, fires once installing new focus has finished, 
			after "OnFocus"
			- resends for all contained widgets
			- doesn't fire if the "prev-new" pair don't really change

		onfontheightdelta
			- see {any_widget.OnFontHeightDelta}

		onhide
			- fires at beginnig of own/parent's 
				= hide
				= hidden
				= destroying
				= setting "visible:= false"
				= closing the window ( receiving event "ek_close",.. )
				= calling "window.close" 
				
		onidle
			- fires everytime when the app GUI event queue gets empty
			- to stop calling for a while, set "again" parameter to "false" (the initial value );
			
			 DON'T DO ANYTHING AFFECTING THE APP EVENT QUEUE ( MODAL WINDOWS, "ShowMessage", Sleep(N),... ) IN THIS HANDLER. 
				MODAL WINDOWS CAUSE RECURSION ! 
			
			A code fragment:

				again:= i < 5;
				if not again then exit;

		onkeydown
			- fires on pressing down a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused

		onkeyup
			- fires on releasing a keyboard key over the client area when none of child widgets is focused

		onmouseevent
			- fires on any mouse activity over the client area

		onmove
			- see {any_window.OnMove}

		onpopup
			- see {any_widget.OnPopup}

		onresize
			- see {any_widget.OnResize}

		onshortcut
			- fires before built-in shorcut processing
			- "info.eventstate=es_processed" set in "OnShortcut" prevents 
			the event from further auto-processing

			The app 
				- recognizes & takes registered shortcuts from app event queue
				- passes the shocrcut event to each of its windows until the event 
				is processed otherwise processes it by oneself 
			

		onshow
			- fires if the widget is visible:
				= on calling "Show" method
				= on return from "Loaded" procedure
				= on showing the parent widget
			- since called at end, allows to adjust the default behavior

		onshowhint
			- see {any_widget.OnShowHint}

		onstatbeforeread 
			- fires before loading statvars  from the disk file

		onstatafterread
			- fires once statvars are loaded from the disk file

		onstatupdate 
			- fires at 1-st stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars
			or 
			- fires at pre-last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"

		onstatread 
			- fires at 2-nd stage before updating GUI "state/pos" for read statvars

		onstatwrite
			- fires at last stage before saving GUI "state/pos"

		pon stat reading, non-minimized visible windows are shown, 
		the active window is activated 

TDockFormWidget

TPaintbox

How to draw line (or circle) on tpaintbox? In event onpaint:

 
 procedure tmainfo.paintboxonpaint(const sender: twidget; const canvas: tcanvas); 
 begin 
  with sender,canvas do begin 
   drawline(nullpoint,pointty(size),cl_yellow);  
   //diagonal line across widget 
   drawellipse(makerect(makepoint(bounds_cx div 2,bounds_cy div 2), size),cl_red); 
   //circle (or ellipse) centered in widget                             
  end; 
 end;

Makepoint and makerect are in msegraphutils.

TEventWidget

A widget which publishes all possible events of a twidget. Normally it is better to implement your own specialized descendant of an existing widget instead to use teventwidget.

TButton

  • A rectangular clickable area that can show text/bitmap.

- Main properties:

Caption: read/write the text that appear on top of it.
onexecute: read/write the address of a procedure (event handler) to be executed when clicked.

TStockGlyphButton

TRichButton

TLabel

  • Draws a piece of text on the given surface (canvas: screen/printer/bitmap).

- Main properties:

Caption: read/write the piece of text.

See also TLabel

TGroupBox

TStepBox

TStringDisp

  • A read only version of TStringEdit, difference from TLabel: has a frame around it.

-Main properties:

Value: read/write the text that are showed.
Caption: A label normally describing the purpose or meaning of the presented text, it can be positioned around the frame.

TByteStringDisp

TIntegerDisp

TRealDisp

TDateTimeDisp

TBooleanDisp

TToolBar

TDrawGrid

TStringGrid

TTabBar

TTabPage

TTabWidget

TDockHandle

TDockPanel

TSpliter

	       A widget very similar to "tspacer" but :
		- designed to rearrange areas occupied by adjacent widgets
		- a linked widget may only enlarge by "eating" the opposite one, 
		so the summary area of both widgets don't change
		- has GUI look ( hatched grip, color etc) switched on by default
		- facilitates run-time repositioning oneself and linked widgets
		- linked widgets may even be other splitters, spacers (with their linked widgets ),..
	
        Properties:

	- color
		= see {any_widget.color}

	- cursor
		= see {any_widget.cursor}

	- enabled
		= "false" stops user interaction

	- face
		= see {any_face}

	- frame
		= see {any_frame}

	- colorgrip
		= color of grip hatching

	- grip
		= defines hatching pattern of the grip

			* stb_dens(N) : the pattern is of rhombuses, the painted rhombs occupy "N" persents of the grip

			* stb_block(N) : the pattern is of squares, painted & unpainted squares are equally sized and 
			both have "N" pixels sides
			
			* stb_hatchup(N) : the pattern is of right-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
			each "N"-th pixel forms these lines

			* stb_hatchdown(N) : the pattern is of left-tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
			each "N"-th pixel forms these lines

			* stb_crosshatch(N) : the pattern is of crossing (left & right) tilted lines of 1 pixel width,
			each "N"-th pixel forms these lines


	- linkbottom/linkleft/linkright/linktop 
		= see {tspacer.*}

	- options

		= spo_hmove
			* "true" allows the spliter to move horizontally

		= spo_hprop
			* "true" : keep the left position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to weigth of the client area of parent

		= spo_hsizeprop
			* "true" : keep width of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to weigth of the client area of parent
			* the width stops shrinking on one set in design time

		= spo_vmove
			* "true" allows the spliter to move vertically

		= spo_vprop
			* "true" : keep the top position proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to height of the client area of parent

		= spo_vsizeprop
			* "true" : keep height of the spacer proportional ( on the ratio of creation time ) 
			to height of the client area of parent
			* the height stops shrinking on one set in design time

		= spo_dockleft
			* causes the "linkleft" widget to dock to the left border of splitter
			* make sence only if linkleft "widget.bounds_x" less than "splitter.bounds_x"

		= spo_docktop
			* causes the "linktop" widget to dock to the top border of splitter
			* make sence only if linktop "widget.bounds_y" less than "splitter.bounds_y"

		= spo_dockright
			* causes the "linkright" widget to dock to the right border of splitter
			* make sence only if linkright "widget.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)" more than "splitter.(bounds_x+bounds_cx)"

		= spo_dockbottom
			* causes the "linkbottom" widget to dock to the bottom border of splitter
			* make sence only if linkbottom "widget.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)" more than "splitter.(bounds_y+bounds_cy)"

		!!! Two special cases :

		1. (spo_dockleft = spo_dockright = TRUE) && (linkleft = linkright = the_same_widget) : 
			causes the "linkleft" widget to adjust to h-positiion & width of the splitter, 
			it's even possible that the widget doesn't touch the splitter

			(spo_docktop = spo_dockbottom = TRUE) && (linktop = linkbottom = the_same_widget) : 
			causes the "linktop" widget to adjust to v-position & height of the splitter, 

			It's even possible in these cases that the widget doesn't touch the splitter

	- optionsscale
		= see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}

	- optionswidget
		= see {anywidget.optionswidget}

	- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus,
	  onfontheightdelta, onmove, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint
		= see "tspacer"

	- onupdatelayout
		fires :
		
		= on creating the splitter
		= on any reposition of the linked widgets 
		( due to moving the splitter, resizing the parent,.. )

TSpacer

* a regular widget which creates a kind of positional link between surrounding widgets
* designed to maintain distances between widgets
* may have GUI look, caption etc switched off by default
* resizing a spacer repositions its linked widgets

Properties:

- anchors = see {any_widget.anchors}

- bounds = see {any_widget.bounds}

- color = see {any_widget.color}

- enabled = "false" turns color of the caption to gray

- visible = "true" allows displayable settings (caption text, face, frame etc) to take effect in run-time as well

- <face> = see {any face}

- <frame> = see {any frame}

- linkbottom = widget linked down to most outer edge (incl. frame[.caption]) of the spacer - linkleft = widget linked left to most outer edge of the spacer - linkright = widget linked right to most outer edge of the spacer - linktop = widget linked up to most outer edge of the spacer

- dist_bottom, dist_left, dist_right, dist_top : = margins between most outer edge the spacer and the corresponding linked widget

- options :

= spao_glueright

- if "false"

h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkleft widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift

if {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be right-resized with auto h-resizing the linkright widget so that the right margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_right IN linkright_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be right-resized with auto h-shifting the linkright widget so that width of that widget is kept

- if "true"

h-repositioning or h-resizing the linkright widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to h-shift

if {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be h-resized with auto h-resizing the linkleft widget so that the left margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_left IN linkleft_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be h-resized with auto h-shifting the linkleft widget so that width of that widget is kept

= spao_gluebottom

- if "false"

v-repositioning or v-resizing the linktop widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift

if {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linkbottom widget so that the bottom margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_bottom IN linkbottom_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linkbottom widget so that height of that widget is kept

- if "true"

v-repositioning or v-resizing the linkbottom widget shifts the whole linked construction, it becomes the only way to v-shift

if {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-resizing the linktop widget so that the top margin of that widget is kept

if NOT {an_top IN linktop_widget.anchors} then the spacer may be v-resized with auto v-shifting the linktop widget so that height of that widget is kept

- optionsscale = see {tscalingwidget.optionsscale}

- optionswidget = see {anywidget.optionswidget}

- onactivate, onchildscaled, ondeactivate, ondefocus, onenter, onexit, onfocus, onfontheightdelta, onpopup, onresize, onshowhint = see {any_widget.*}

- onmove = see {any_window.OnMove}

any "link*" option set disables the spacer to reposition solely, repositioning is only controlled by a "glued" widget since then

TLayouter

  • a tspacer descendant designed to (auto)resize or/and move its contained widgets acc to some size/positon dependencies
  • may have GUI look, frame caption etc switched off by default
  • layouters may be nested to achieve complex layouts

Each layout change/assignment is divided into performing 3 consequent stages :

Stage 1

Widgets auto resized using the following options:

- if {lao_placex OR lao_placey} :

		= if {plo_scalesize in optionslayout}  then
			* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" are h-scaled 
		  	  in the proportion of change of tlayouter's clientwidth
			* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" are v-scaled 
		  	  in the proportion  of change of tlayouter's clientheight

			For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :

		 	 |--Widget__1---Widget__2--|		=> the initial look

		  	 |--Widget_1--Widget_2--|			=> the layouter gets narrower

		  	 |---Widget___1---Widget___2---|	=> the layouter gets wider

			*** both widget sizes & margins are affected ***
			*** Widget_N may generally situate on different y-levels *** 
		  	
	otherwise :

		= if lao_scalewidth in optionslayout :
			* widgets with "osk_nopropwith" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode 
		 	  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are h-scaled in the proportion 
		 	  as far as clientwidth of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied

			For h-resized layouter, the effect looks like :

			  |--Single____widget????|		=> the initial look

			  |--Single__widget???|			=> the layouter gets narrower

			  |--Single_______widget?????|	=> the layouter gets wider

			* also, if {lao_scaleleft in optionslayout} then left margins of the widgets 
			  with unset "optionsskin.osk_nopropleft" resize too otherwise retain

		= if lao_scaleheight in optionslayout :
			* widgets with "osk_nopropheight" unset in their "optionsskin" enters in the mode 
		 	  ( not applied until the layouter resizes! ) when they are v-scaled in the proportion 
		  	  as far as clientheight of the tlayouter changes, then stages 2 & 3 are reapplied

			* also, if {lao_scaletop in optionslayout} then top margins of the widgets 
			  with unset "optionsskin.osk_noproptop" resize too otherwise retain

			*** only widget sizes & margins not distances between them are affected ***

Stage 2

Widgets may be auto resized in 5 consequent steps using the following options:


1. if plo_syncmaxautosize in place_options :
   = all widgets are autosized then their client areas are synchronised to the
     clientareas of the highest and the widest of the widget
   * calls "msegui.syncmaxautosize"

2. if plo_syncpaintwidth in place_options :
   = the paintwidths of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
     widest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" )
   * mainly makes sense if "lao_alignx" set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
     ( see below ) when the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the
     inner client width of tlayouter:

                                   x-align level           
                                         V                 
                        +----------------------------------+
                        | Widget_1 the_widest_frame_caption|
                        | Widget_2 frame_caption2          |
                        | Widget_N wider_frame_captionN    |
                        +----------------------------------+

   here, the effect is shown for "cp_right" frame captions
     // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) width 
     // of the Z-top widget
   * calls "msegui.syncpaintwidth"
   * paintwidth is the outer width

3. if plo_syncpaintheight in place_options :
   = the paintheights of all widgets are synchronized to the widget with the
     highest outer frame width ( ex. width of "frame.caption" ).
   * mainly makes sense if lao_aligny set and {align_glue = wam_start or wam_end}
     ( see below ) the widgets will be adjusted in order to fit into the inner
     client height of tlayouter :

                        +------------------------------+
                        | The_                         |
                        | tallest_            taller_  |
                        | frame_    frame_    frame_   |
                        | caption   caption2  captionN |  
                        |                              |
                        | Widget1   Widget_2  Widget_N |<== y-align level 
                        +------------------------------+     		

  here, the effect is shown for "cp_topleft" frame captions
    // otherwise syncronizes to the outer ( of the frame except its caption ) 
    // height of the Z-top widget
  * calls "msegui.syncpaintheight"
 
4. plo_synccaptiondistx in place_options :
   = causes all widgets to have the widest common room for their cp_(left/right)* frame captions
   * calls "msegui.synccaptiondistx"
 
5. plo_synccaptiondisty in place_options :
   = causes all widgets to have the highest common room for their cp_(top/bottom)* frame captions
   * calls "msegui.synccaptiondisty"

Stage 3

The widgets may be (re)arranged within the layouter.

There're 2 modes of such (re)arrangement which can be partially (orthogonally)
combined (see later):

1) The place(ment) mode ( lao_place* in optionslayout ) :

- widgets are placed at some distances between each other, possibly with some
  margins, rooms of invisible widgets ( having visible=false) are also allocated
  unless "plo_noinvisible in place_options"

  * the widgets are placed in the order of decreasing their "widgetrect.x"
	coordinates before alignment
  
  * the inter-widget distances and the side margins ( if apllied ) in both
	dimentions are identical and limited between "place_mindist" and
	"place_maxdist"
  
  = if {lao_placex in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the
	following relevant settings apply:
  
	* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" :
	
		# |Widget_1------Widget_2------Widget_3| 
	
	* non-limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} :
	
		# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_3????|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_start} and
	  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |---Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} :
	
		# |??????Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
	  {plo_propmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3---|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_center} :
	
		# |???Widget_1---Widget_2---Widget_3???|
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
	
		# |Widget_1----Widget_2----Widget_____3|, or
		
		# |Widget_1----Widget_____2----Widget_3|, or
		
		# |Widget_____1----Widget_2----Widget_3|, here, the most left amongst
		widgets having both [an_left,an_right] set is expanded otherwise the most
		right widget ( Widget_3 in the example )
		
	* limiting value of "place_maxdist" and {place_mode = wam_end} and
	  {plo_propmargin in place_options} and {plo_endmargin in place_options} :
	  
		# |--Widget_1--Widget_____2--Widget_3--|,
		  
	The Legend:
	===========
	limiting value of "place_maxdist" : such value which produce some visual
	effect on the layouter
	
	  "----" :           distance ( = number of minuses, limited by place_maxdis )
	  "????" :           some remaining space ( = number of questmarks )
	  "Widget_1" :       widget of the original size
	  "Widget__..__1" : (auto)resized widget
  
  = if {lao_placey in optionslayout} and {place_mode <> wam_none} then the things
	are handled in the same manner as with "lao_placex" but for the vertical
	"top2bottom" direction of placement instead of the horizontal "left2right" one.

2) the align(ment) mode ( optionslayout.lao_align* ) :

- widgets are gathered into a visual group to a dedicated "leader" widget of
  the layout ( set by "align_leader" and defaults to the lowest in
  Z-Order = twidget.widgets[0] ) the leader stays in place while the others :

  = if lao_alignx in optionslayout ( the hor alignment mode ):
	  * if align_mode = wam_start :
		snap their left borders to the left border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
		snap their right borders to the right border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
		snap their v-axes to the v-axis of leader after that,
  = if lao_aligny in optionslayout ( the vert alignment mode ):
	  * if align_mode = wam_start :
		snap their top borders to the top border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_end :
		snap their bottom borders to the bottom border of leader
	  * else if align_mode = wam_center :
		snap their h-axes to the h-axis of leader

- after that, the whole widget group can be aligned within the layouter:

  = if align_glue =  wam_start
	  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
		the left extent of group snaps to the left border of layouter
	  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
		the top extent of group snaps to the top border of layouter
  = else if align_glue = wam_end
	  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
		the right extent of group snaps to the right border of layouter
	  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
		the bottom extent of group snaps to the bottom border of layouter
  = else if align_glue =  wam_center
	  * if lao_alignx in optionslayout:
		the v-axis of group snaps to the v-axis of layouter
	  * if lao_aligny in optionslayout:
		the h-axis of group snaps to the h-axis of layouter

Mutually exclusive settings:
* only one of "align_mode" can be choosen
* only one of  "glue_mode" can be choosen
* "optionslayout.lao_alignx" & 	"optionslayout.lao_placex"
* "optionslayout.lao_aligny" & 	"optionslayout.lao_placey"

V-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_aligny ) may be combined with h-placement
( optionslayout.lao_placex ), and h-alignment ( optionslayout.lao_alignx ) may
be combined with v-placement ( optionslayout.lao_placey )

NOTE:
  The effects of the above described { resizing / placement / alignment } are
  irreversible. So, the only way to revert is to set "wan_none" then to revert
  manually.

TListView

TImage

<any image>

	*** Note that switch to the monochrome mode is irerreversible ! ***

	alignment:

		By default, images are top-left aligned, with the original size preserved.

		al_xcentered = centers the image horizontally
		al_ycentered = centers the image vertically

		al_right = docks the image to the right border of placeholder
		al_bottom = docks the image to the bottom border of placeholder

		al_grayed = fills non-transparent areas with the selected color

		al_stretchx = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in width
		al_stretchy = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in height
		al_fit = adjusts size so that to fill the placeholder in both width & height

		al_tiled = spawns the image & tile the whole  placeholder with the copies 

		Interpolation mode while stretching

			al_intpol =	antialiases as far as the size changes 
						(the only working in Linux)
			al_or = interpolation pixel operation is "or" -> 1's are extended
			al_and = interpolation pixel operation is "and" -> 0's are extended
		( al_or and al_and only on win32, mainly useful for stretching of monochrome bitmaps) :

	colorbackground = color of image transparent ( masked ) areas in monochrome 
						non-masked mode 
	colorforeground = color of non-transparent areas in monochrome mode  

	options:

		bmo_monochrome = fills non-transparent areas with "colorforeground", 
						also, in non-masked mode, fills transparent areas 
						with "colorbackground"

		bmo_masked = activates built-in image transparency {it "hides" transparent (masked) areas}
		bmo_colormask = applies faded edge transparency on the color masked areas in the image

	transparency = makes the image transparent as long as enlights areas behind 
					the image with the selected color

	transparentcolor = for a non-masked image, assigns a color indicate transparency areas
					( on matching areas, the image will be seen through )

TDial

TChart

There are demos here:

https://github.com/mse-org/mseuniverse/tree/master/attic/msedocumenting/mse/trunk/help/tutorials/widgets/charts

TChartRecorder

TPolygon

TPickWidget

TOpenglWidget

Edit

TStringEdit

TMemoEdit

THexStringEdit

TDropdownListEdit

A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.

THistoryEdit

A tstringedit which shows the previously entered values in a dropdownlist for selection.

TIntegerEdit

TKeyStringEdit

Maps string to string.

TEnumEdit

Maps integer to string, zero based and sequencial (first item 0, next 1, ...).

TEnumTypeEdit

A TEnumEdit which maps Pascal enums to their names. Use OnInit event to store the typeinfo pointer of the enum type into sender.typeinfopo.

 
procedure tmainfo.enumtypeeditinit(const sender: tenumtypeedit);
begin
  sender.typeinfopo := PTypeInfo(TypeInfo(TMyEnumeratedType));
end;

TSelector

TSelector is the most specialized widget of the dropdown editwidget group, it is based on tenumedit (tenumedit maps an integer to a string) and uses for the dropdownlist a second map which must be created on the fly in ongetdropdowninfo. An example is tcommselector where the enumedit maps commnrty to commname and the dropdownlist shows the available RS232 ports only.

TRealEdit

TRealSpinEdit

TDateTimeEdit

TCalendarDateTimeEdit

TEdit

MSEgui counterpart of Delphi TEdit. You will never use it.

TWidgetGrid

TItemEdit

TDropDownItemEdit

A tstringedit with a dropdownlist to choose text values. Important dropdown.options members:
- deo_autodropdown dropdown on keypress
- deo_selectonly don't allow entering arbitrary text.
- deo_forceselect don't allow entering empty text.

TMBDropDownItemEdit

TTreeItemEdit

TRecordFieldEdit

Used in twidgetgrid in order to edit fields of a ttreeitemedit. Example is MSEide projecttreeform.pas.

TDialogStringEdit

A tstringedit with an ellipse button. Use "onexecute" to show the dialog.

TPointerEdit

TSlider

TProgressBar

TBooleanEdit

TBooleanEditRadio

TDataButton

A button with an integer value. Clicking increments the value until "max", then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid. The current value selects the showed image and face by the items of "imagenums" and "valuefaces".

TStockGlyphDataButton

TDataIcon

Shows an imagelist item by lookup from "value" to "imagenums". Clicking increments value until "max" then it restarts with "min". Can be inserted into a twidgetgrid.

TTextEdit

Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a text editor, used in MSEide source editor.

TDataImage

A pixmap display widget which can be inserted into twidgetgrid.

TTerminal

Only useful if inserted into a twidgetgrid, builds a very simple terminal emulator. Used in MSEide target console.

NoGui

TAction

	Shortcut processing order :

	- the smallest piece of processing is "doshortcut" procedure which 
	is called until processed:
		= starting from the sender up to the toplevel widget
		= then by all child widgets with non-set "ow_noparentshortcut" 
		= then, if "ow_nochildshortcut" isn't set, by the parent widget
		= then by the widget oneself
	
	- "doshortcut" is checked in the following order:
		= starting from form's main menu
		= then from the owning window ( the widget oneself ) 
		= then from the application


		*** A shortcut is bound to a widget by :
			- placing an action component on the widget ***
			- direct assigning the shortcut to the widget (menus,..) 
	---------------------------

		caption, color, colorglyph, helpcontext, hint, imagecheckedoffset,
		imagelist <see "timagelist">, imagenr, imagenrdisabled

			- sets look of "clients" (buttons, menu/toolbar items,..), unless 
			these clients have "state.as_local*" set :

		*** For meaning of these options, see help on the "client" widgets ***

	group
		- default value for one-named property of the bound widgets
		( menu items,... )

	options :
		ao_updateonidle
			- runs this action in cycle, waiting for no gui events everytime

		ao_globalshortcut 
			- allows the action to trigger on a non-main form
			  (the shortcut is triggered whatever form of the applicatin it was pressed on, 
			  otherwise only when the form where the aption is placed on is focused )

		ao_nocandefocus 
			- causes the action not to call "CanDefocus" for focused edit widget of active form
			  before executing own code
			  ( it helps to avoid the effect of cancelling changes in these widgets 
			  on activating the bound shortcut )

	shortcut
		- keyboard combination triggering the action

	shortcut
		- alternative "shortcut" and handled identically

	state :

		as_disabled
			- prevents the action from triggering, also puts the bound widgets to "disabled" look

		as_invisible
			- in run-time, hides the bound widget, still reacting on the shortcut or direct call

		as_checked
			- selects the bound menu item if it has "mao_checkbox" option set

		as_default
		as_local*

	statfile	
		<see "tstatfile">

	stavarname

	
	tagaction
	onasyncevent
	onchange
	onexecute
	onupdate

TActivator

TCustomLookupbuffer

	-	provides a group of parallel arrays of float(=datetime), integer and widestring types,
		and facilities to :
			= search in any array
			= on found position, quickly obtain corresponding value in another array
	-	for each type, several arrays  may be kept
	- 	each array is integer-indexed, even string ones ( case[in]sensitive )
	-	uses two way of accessing arrays data, through :
			= physic : array storage index ( row number ) directly
			= logical : the integer index ( see above ):
				first, physic row number is known for the logical index then the data 
				are accessed with the found number

			*** logical index values are built automatically based on array values, 
			on updating its data ***
	- dont' have interface to load data ( see its descendants for that )
	
	fieldcountfloat - number of float arrays
	fieldcountinteger - number of integer arrays
	fieldcounttext - number of widestring arrays

	Event handlers:
		- onchange

	Public interface:

   		procedure beginupdate; - marks beginning of "update"
   		procedure endupdate; - if all "update" finished, fires "onchange" event
	 	procedure clearbuffer; - clears all arrays then fires "onchange"

   		procedure checkbuffer; 
   			- [re]loads the arrays with most actual data
   			- just a stub here since doesn't have a data source

   		function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer/realty/msestring;
         	out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno" 
			for value "avalue" starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index 
			if found else next bigger; 

   		function find(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;
                 out aindex: integer;
                 const caseinsensitive: boolean;
                 const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue", 
			in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from logical index "aindex", returns "true" and the updated logical index 
			if found else next bigger;

   		function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: integer;
         	out aindex: integer; const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches integer/realty(datetime) array "fieldno" 
			for value "avalue" starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number 
			if found else next bigger; 

		function findphys(const fieldno: integer; const avalue: msestring;  out aindex: integer; const caseinsensitive: boolean;
                 const filter: lbfiltereventty = nil): boolean; overload;
			- applies external filtering ("filter" procedure) then incrementally searches widestring array "fieldno" for value "avalue", 
			in "caseinsensitive" manner, starting from row number "aindex", returns "true" and the updated row number  
			if found else next bigger;

			The external filtering ("filter") procedure takes the arguments of the caller 
			togehther with physical row number found in the caller which allows 
			to check several values at once for that number, within the filter
			
		function integervaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" at row number "aindex" 
              
		function integervaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			-  returns value of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex" 

		function integerindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			- returns row number of integer array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"

		function integerindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of indexes of integer array "fiedlno"

		function integerar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of data of integer array "fiedlno"
   
		function floatvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
			-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" at row number "aindex" 

		function floatvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer): realty;
			-  returns value of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex" 

		function floatindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer): integer;
			- returns row number of real/datetime array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"

		function floatindexar(const fieldno: integer): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of indexes of real/datetime array "fiedlno"

		function floatar(const fieldno: integer): realarty;
			- returns all bunch of data of real/datetime array "fiedlno"   

		function textvaluephys(const fieldno,aindex: integer): msestring;
			-  returns value of widestring array "fieldno" at row number "aindex" 

		function textvaluelog(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
                       const caseinsensitive: boolean): msestring;
			-  returns value of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex" 

		function textindex(const fieldno,aindex: integer;
                      const caseinsensitive: boolean): integer;
			- returns row number of widestring array "fieldno" where the array index equals to "aindex"

		function textindexar(const fieldno: integer;
                            const caseinsensitive: boolean): integerarty;
			- returns all bunch of indexes of widestring array "fiedlno"

		function textar(const fieldno: integer): msestringarty;
			- returns all bunch of data of widestring array "fiedlno"   

   
		function lookupinteger(const integerkeyfieldno,integerfieldno,
                                keyvalue: integer): integer; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( 0 if not found )

		function lookupinteger(const stringkeyfieldno,integerfieldno: integer;
                         const keyvalue: msestring): integer; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "integerfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( 0 if not found )

		function lookuptext(const integerkeyfieldno,textfieldno,
                                keyvalue: integer): msestring; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( '' if not found )

		function lookuptext(const stringkeyfieldno,textfieldno: integer;
                      const keyvalue: msestring): msestring; overload;
			- returns value of integer array "textfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( '' if not found )


		function lookupfloat(const integerkeyfieldno,floatfieldno,
                                keyvalue: integer): realty; overload;
			- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel integer array "integerkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( emptyreal if not found )

		function lookupfloat(const stringkeyfieldno,floatfieldno: integer;
                                keyvalue: msestring): realty; overload;

			- returns value of real/datetime array "floatfieldno" at position where
				value of parallel widestring array "stringkeyfieldno" equals to "keyvalue"
                ( emptyreal if not found )

		function count: integer; - returns number of data rows

		property fieldcounttext: integer; -  returns/sets number of widestring arrays
		property fieldcountfloat: integer; - returns/sets number of real/datetime arrays
		property fieldcountinteger: integer; - returns/sets number of integer arrays

		 the above "fieldcount*" props clear the buffer on setting a value 

		property integervalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: integer; - a shortcut to "integervaluephys"
		property floatvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: realty; - a shortcut to "floatvaluephys"
		property textvalue[const fieldno,aindex: integer]: msestring; - a shortcut to "textvaluephys"

		property onchange: notifyeventty; 
			- called in "changed" wich in turn is called in :
				= clearbuffer
				= endupdate
				= doasyncevent
				= loaded
				= tlookupbuffer.addrow

TLookupBuffer

tlookupbuffer = class(tcustomlookupbuffer)

	- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with methods of run-time data filling

	- see <tcustomlookupbuffer>

	+= Extentions to the public interface:

		procedure addrow(const integervalues: array of integer;
                    const textvalues: array of msestring;
                    const floatvalues: array of realty);

			- adds one row to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays,
			array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays

   		procedure addrows(const integervalues: array of integerarty;
                    const textvalues: array of msestringarty;
                    const floatvalues: array of realarty);

			- adds many data rows  to each of widestring arrays, integer arrays and real/datetime arrays, 
			only min length of the input data arrays are inserted, longer data are truncated
			array size of  "{type}values" equals to number of {type} arrays and the size of "{type}values[i]"
			describes number od data elements in the array
		

TDBLookupBuffer

tdblookupbuffer = class(tcustomdblookupbuffer -> tcustomlookupbuffer)

	- extends "tcustomlookupbuffer" with interface to fill arrays with DB-data
	- see <tcustomlookupbuffer> & <tcustomdblookupbuffer>

	 Extentions to the public interface:

   		procedure checkbuffer; - if data obsolete ("invalid") then reloads them from "datasource"
   
		property datasource: tdatasource; - sets/returns DB data source where to load data from
		property textfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of widestring arrays
		property integerfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of integer arrays
		property floatfields: tdbfieldnamearrayprop; - allows to assign a {datasource:datafield} to each of real/datetime arrays

		property optionsdb: lbdboptionsty; - tunes some DB behaviour apects
			-	olbdb_closedataset : 
				= once data obsolete, opens (if needed) the supplier dataset (disabling its bound controls) 
				then [re]loads data from it then closes it

			-	olbdb_invalidateifmodified :
				= gets marked "invalid" once contents of the bound dataset change, 
				it signals to reload the buffer with the new data just before next accessing 
				( for any purpose - searching, lookuping, getting value/(array of values),..)

TDBmemoLookupbuffer

- allows to use  for lookup-ing any text-convertable DB-fields
	- an analog of tdblookupbuffer, but :
		- "integerfields" may be names of any integer-convertable DB-fields
		- "floatfields" may be names of any (real/datetime)-convertable DB-fields
		- "textfields"  may be names of any text-presentable DB-fields

		- each DB-field value ( presenting a memo generally of many lines ) may supply many data rows at once 
		to the bound array of the buffer, since this value will be internally splitted & turned into native array values,
		and the resulting "count" (arrays row count) of the whole buffer will be the minimal rows count amongst arrays 
		of the buffer, the rest data are truncated 

		- when loading widestring arrays, also checks for & performs "utf8-to-widestring" conversion of values of 
		the bound DB-fields so that these arrays always store widestrings

TThreadComp

TStatFile

- so that to be in effect, it should also be assigned to the form where the widget using the stafile is placed on
- in design, if "onstatwrite" is set and "filedir" is not yet created,	deactivate exception "ECreateError" in project settings ( "Debugger" tab )
- "filedir" may contain "~/" indicating the user's home directory
- options "oe_savestate" & "oe_savevalue" of "client" widgets define what to store to the file 
- position etc changes or/and value changes 
- in case when a main form shares its stafile with non-main forms, on creating non-main ones, just edited not saved data of the main form ( bound to vars of the statfile) are reset to values read from the statfile upon creating the form; for "sfo_memory", this effect absents unless widgets on the concurring forms share same variable[s]; to avoid this behaviour, disable "fo_autoreadstat" & "fo_autowritestat" of the non-main forms
- each "tstafile" owns:
 = tstatwriter:
* provides methods of writing sections & statvars to a memory/file stream
- tstatreader:
* holds list of sections with statvars each
* provides search & check & reading interface to the statvars
* provides reading statvars from a memory/file stream

Positioning to a section speeds up accessing its statvars

- there also is "tstatfiler" ( exposed by some "tstatfile" events ) which:
= may present or "tstatwriter" or "tstatreader" ( there's a check method )
= provides directionless "update" methods with internal switch to needed direction of processing 
- "reading" or "writing" statvars on per-section basis


	activator :
		<see tactivator> : NOT YET DONE		

	encoding = "en_utf8" selected here, allows to store non-Latin text in the file
       filedir = directory where to keep the file ( by default - the current working directory )
	filename = name of the file

	options:
		sfo_memory = reads & writes not from a disk file but from a named memory stream 
					( there's an exclusion - see below "sfo_savedata" ),
					mostly useful for presenting last used values on recalling 
					non-main forms etc ( data even survive recreating forms),
					or even for data "exchange" between non-main modal( non-concurring ) forms 
					in case of the target widgets share same statvarnames

		sfo_createpath = creates "filedir" if necessary
		sfo_savedata =	used only with "sfo_memory", commands to save 
						the memory data to the master statfile (see below)						

	sfo_activatorread = activator activate triggers reading ???
	sfo_activatorwrite = activator deactivate triggers writing ???

	statfile = a master statfile
	statvarname = name of section of this file in the upper statfile
	Tag = an integer property for misc purposes

	Event handlers:
		onstatafterread - fires on return from "readstat"
		onstatafterwrite - fires on return from "writestat"
		onstatbeforeread - fires on beginning of "readstat"
		onstatbeforewrite - fires on beginning of "writestat"
		onstatread = fires after reading state data
		onstatwrite = fires after writing state data
		onstatupdate = fires after reading/writing state data just before 
					"onstatread" & "onstatwrite"

	Public methods:

   		procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); override;
   			- does nothing but fixes the default file name as the statfile default
   
   		procedure readstat(stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
   			- rereads all statvars of the stafile/memorystream
   
   		procedure readstat(const aname: msestring; const statreader: tstatreader); overload;
   			- rereads "aname" statvar of the statfile

   		procedure writestat(const stream: ttextstream = nil); overload;
		   	- rewrites all statvars to the stafile/memorystream
			  (if neccessary, prepares to writting - creates "filedir", stafile,...)
   
   		procedure writestat(const aname: msestring; const statwriter: tstatwriter); overload;
   			- overwrites "aname" statvar of the statfile
   		
   		procedure updatestat(const aname: msestring; const statfiler: tstatfiler);
   			- depending on kind of "statfiler" ( writer/reader ), writes/reads 
   			  the most up-to-date stat data

TTimer

TNoGuiAction

TPipeReadercomp

TSysEnvManager

TProcessMonitor

TFilechangeNotifier

TShortCutController

TPostscriptPrinter

TGdiPrinter

TWmfPrinter

TSkinController

TGuiThreadComp

Font

See also : Reference:_MSEgui/TFont

Any Font

    	charset { ANSI/ DEFAULT/ SYMBOL /SHIFTJIS /HANGEUL /GB2312 /CHINESEBIG5 /OEM 
		/JOHAB / HEBREW/ ARABIC/ GREEK/ TURKISH/ VIETNAMESE/ THAI/ EASTEUROPE/
		RUSSIAN/ MAC/ BALTIC }
		- changes the font to the nearest containing the selected encoding(charset)
		- no font change made if the supplied encoding doesn't match any font
	color
		- color of the glyphs contours
	colorbackground
		- fill color of the glyph cells ( not including extraspace )
	colorshadow
		- color of SE glyph "edges" ( if not "cl_none", deactivates "colorbackground" )
	extraspace
		- v-space between glyph cells of adjacent text rows (negative values cause the cells to overlap )
	height
		- v-size of glyph cells, in pixels
	name
		- initially, font is choosen by { "family" = this name }
	options:
		foo_fixed
			- changes the font to the nearest "mono" spaced (usually = Courier)
		foo_proportional
			- changes the font to the nearest "proportionally" spaced (usually = Helvetica)
		foo_helvetica
			- changes the font to the nearest in "sans" category (usually = Helvetica)
		foo_roman
			- changes the font to the nearest in "serif" category (usually = Times[ New Roman])
		foo_script
			- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "script" category
		foo_decorative
			- Win32 only, changes the font to the nearest in "decorative" category
		foo_antialiased
			- Linux-only, enables antialiasing (if disabled by Xft globally)
		foo_nonantialiased
			- Linux-only, disables antialiasing (if enabled by Xft globally) 
			usually making glyph extents (not cells !) a bit wider
	style:
		fs_bold
			- gives the font a "bold" look
		fs_italic
			- gives the font an "italic" look
		fs_underline
			- gives the font an "underlined" look
		fs_strikeout
			- gives the font a "striked out" look
		fs_selected
			- "TRUE" here combined with {tf_noselect:=FALSE}, causes the text described by this font 
			to be initially selected ( with the clipboard operations available ), 
			currently applicable only to richstrings

	width
		- 10*{ glyph cell width, average in pixels }, 0 = {font default}

	xscale
		- width ratio of each glyph {cell & contour}, the effect is similar to "width"

		*** "foo_*" font selection overrides one made with "name" 

		*** if change with "foo_*" is unsuccessful then the nearest "sans" font is usually chosen

		*** The categories :

			sans		=> have no serifs and have strokes of even thickness
			serif		=> have serifs at glyph contours and made up of strokes of varying thickness
			script		=> resemble handwriting
			decorative	=> flashy styles to be used sparingly in headlines or posters

GUI

TWindow

twindow = class(teventobject,icanvas)
  public

	// releases mouse, unlinks from the canvas, processes all pending events of the window
	// if called from within main thread then destroys the window directly
	// otherwise posts a window destroy event for oneself and waits for it to be processed
	procedure destroywindow;

	// registers the instance of onself in the "owner" widget, allocates the canvas, 
	// adds a reference to oneself,
	// then prepares the "owner" hierarchy to be invalidated ( "owner.rootchanged" )
	// since now, the window is allocated and belongs to the "aowner" widget 
	constructor create(aowner: twidget);

	destructor destroy; override;

	// adds "method" to the internal list of scroll dependants
	procedure registeronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);

	// removes "method" from the internal list of scroll dependants
	procedure unregisteronscroll(const method: notifyeventty);

	// releases mouse if captured, resets the cursor, then enters an event loop for the window,
	// TRUE on return if the window is destroyed
	function beginmodal: boolean;
 
	  * checks if the "sender" window is already modal to avoid circularity, 
	    if not then starts an event loop  for the "sender" where the "sender" is a receiver of GUI events,
   	    once the loop is terminated reactivates the previously active window if it was,
	    TRUE if modalwindow destroyed  

	  function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;

	// removes the internal stuff which indicates the modal state
	procedure endmodal;

	// if the window is visible, 
	// deactivates the previously active window, shows the window (see below),
	// if no active window in the app or the window or its Z-predecessor is modal and 
	// the app has no focused widget then prepares the bound widget to be focused,
	// then addresses the WM to put the window to foreground
	procedure activate;

	  // if the bound widget has visible=true then:
	  //  - if NOT windowevent then :
	  //    = address the WM to set size of the window acc to window opts 
	  //      wp_maximized, wp_fullscreen or normal size otherwise
	  //	= if the window is normally sized, moves it to its default position is specified ( screen centered etc )
	  // - unhides/unminimizes the window if needed
	  // - shows other windows of the applications acc to state of the window group 
	  // ( in normal size or minimized )

	  private 
		procedure twindow.show(windowevent: boolean);

	// TRUE if this window currently grabs user input
	( a widget drawn within the window(=form) is in focus,.. )
	function active: boolean;

	// if the window was active then deactivates the window  & remembers it as the previous active ( to restore leater if requested ),
	// returns TRUE if that storage occurred
	function deactivateintermediate: boolean; 

	// makes the window active & clears the above app reference to it ( "active before deactivating" )
	procedure reactivate; //clears app.finactivewindow

	// scans the app event queue for "ek_expose" event[s] addressed to the window,
	// if found then redraws that part of the window which the event describes
	// ( processed events are then deleted )
	procedure update;

	// TRUE if the window :
	// 1) doesn't have an inner widget grabbing input focus
	// or
	// 2) has such widget, and this widget ( and all its descendants ) 
	//    pass "CanClose" check
	//
	// *** see also "twidget.CanClose" ***
	//
	function candefocus: boolean;

	// tries to defocus the currently focused widget if it belongs to the window,
	// if succeeds then executes code of virtual "DoDefocus" of the widget descessor
	// ( this code defines behaviour & look of the widget on defocusing );
	//
	// no defocusing is done if the focused widget ( or its descendants ) 
	// doesn't pass "CanClose" check
	//
	procedure nofocus;
   
   	// setfocusedwidget(widget)
   
   property focuscount: cardinal read ffocuscount;
   function close: boolean; //true if ok
   procedure beginmoving; //lock window rect modification
   procedure endmoving;
   procedure bringtofront;
   procedure sendtoback;
   procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twindow);
       //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means top
   procedure stackover(const predecessor: twindow);
       //stacking is performed in mainloop idle, nil means bottom
   function stackedunder: twindow; //nil if top
   function stackedover: twindow;  //nil if bottom
   function hastransientfor: boolean;

   procedure capturemouse;
   procedure releasemouse;
   procedure postkeyevent(const akey: keyty; 
        const ashiftstate: shiftstatesty = []; const release: boolean = false;
                  const achars: msestring = '');

   function winid: winidty;
   function haswinid: boolean;
   function state: windowstatesty;
   function visible: boolean;
   function activating: boolean; //in internalactivate proc
   function normalwindowrect: rectty;
   property updateregion: regionty read fupdateregion;
   function updaterect: rectty;

   procedure registermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);
   procedure unregistermovenotification(sender: iobjectlink);

   property options: windowoptionsty read foptions;

	// widget 
	property owner: twidget read fowner;

   property focusedwidget: twidget read ffocusedwidget;
   property transientfor: twindow read ftransientfor;
   property modalresult: modalresultty read fmodalresult write setmodalresult;
   property buttonendmodal: boolean read getbuttonendmodal write setbuttonendmodal;
   property globalshortcuts: boolean read getglobalshortcuts write setglobalshortcuts;
   property localshortcuts: boolean read getlocalshortcuts write setlocalshortcuts;
   property windowpos: windowposty read getwindowpos write setwindowpos;
   property caption: msestring read fcaption write setcaption;


 windowoptionty = (wo_popup,wo_message,wo_buttonendmodal,wo_groupleader,
                   wo_windowcentermessage); //showmessage centered in window


	optionswindow:
		wo_popup 
			- in run-time, hides all OS windows-manager ( WM ) decorations (title bar, buttons "Close/Resize,Min/Max" etc),
			letting only its client area to appear
			so :
				= the window should have own facilities to replace the deactivated WM functionality if needed
				= can't be resized/maximize/minimized/moved
		wo_message
			- similar to "wo_popup" but allows WM to close ( with "Close" button ) & move the window

		wo_groupleader
			- keeps on the WM taskbar a shortcut to the window 
			( if the parent window is a groupleader too then displays a step upper in its group )

	Event handlers:

	 - onmove
		= fires once the (window/widget) is created/moved ( with check if really moved by a distance)

TFormScrollbox

- presents client area of form & parent of its widgets, 
	initially stretched to fit the form & bound with anchoring 
	but may be adjusted with "bounds" & "anchors"
   
    Properties:
                
	anchors
	bounds
	
	color
		- color of the whole container area ( except its frame ) & form widgets 
		if their color is "cl_parent"

	name = container

	cursor,	enabled, face, frame, helpcontext, hint, optionswidget, popupmenu,
	taborder, tag, visible, onactivate, onafterpaint, onbeforepaint, 
	onchildmouseevent, onclientmouseevent, ondeativate, ondefocus, onenter,
	onexit, onfocus, onfontheightdelta, onmouseevent, onpaint, onpopup
	onresize, onshowhint
		- the same meaning as for the served form


	oncalcminscrollsize	
	onscroll
	onchildscaled	

TFaceList

TFrameComp

See also here: Reference:_MSEgui/TFrame.


	Terminology :

	{client area = area of the widget which interacts with a user}

	{bevelling = additional facets rising/sinking frame & client area, 
		constists of two parts - 
			- external: between frame and widget
			- internal: between frame and client area
	}

	{frame=	flat space between external & internal facets,
			floats at the inner level of the external facet
 	}

	*** Both frame & bevelling affect the client area ***

	--------------------------
	template:

		colorclient	=	color of the client area

		colorframe =	color of the frame
		colorframeactive =	used instead of colorframe if the widget is
							active; "cl_default" means same as colorframe.

		works if (leveli/levelo <> 0 that's the facets exist :

			colorshadow = color of facets screened from the NW light source
			colordkshadow =	color of shadows dropped by the NW light source
        	        colordkwidth =	width of the shadows in pixel, -1=default

			colorlight = color of facets exposed to the NW light source
			colorhighlight = color of brighter edges of the facets
                 	colorhlwidth = width of the brighter edges in pixel, -1=default

		        extraspace = if applied to menu items, adds more space between these items

		framei_:
			(for extendable widgets like menus, these settings widen the widget,
			for non-extendable like buttons - they squeeze the text area )

			bottom=	lower margin of text to the client area
			left =	left margin of text to the client area
			right =	margin of text to the client area
			top =	upper margin of text to the client area

		framewidth=	width of the frame
	leveli = {width=height} of the internal facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken
	levelo = {width=height} of the external facet, positive -> raised, negative -> sunken

<any frame>

	*** extends & customizes "tframecomp" ***

	template
		- "tframecomp" supplying the initial settings

	colorclient,colordkshadow,colordkwidth,colorframe,colorframeactive,
	colorhighlight,colorhlwidth,colorlight,colorshadow,framewidth, 
	leveli, levelo, framei_*,

		<see "tframecomp">

	font
		<see "tfont">

	caption	
		- some descriptive text( function name, user prompt,...) placed 
		in a N/W/S/E-combination to the widget's client area

		*** 
		non-empty caption if (captionpos <> cp_center) & (captiondistouter=false & captiondist>0) enlarges the framed widget 
		by the corresponding size of caption

		***

	captiondist - margin between the caption & the client area

	captiondistouter :

	- if "false"(by default), the distance is measured between 
		the inner (facing the client area) extent of the caption 
		and the client area outward the area, 
		the caption is placed outside of the client area

	- if "true", the caption is mirrored against the edge of client area as 
		to the position when "false"

		*** nagative values of "captiondist" visually inverse "out of" and within ***

       captionnoclip - do not clip frame and client area for caption background 
					( the client area preserves own background under the caption text)

	captionnooffset - shift orthogonal to "captiondist"

	captionpos - "corner" where to place the caption

	localprops :

		frl_levelo - "levelo" overrides "template.levelo"
		frl_leveli - "leveli" overrides "template.leveli"
		frl_framewidth - "framewidth" overrides "template.framewidth"
		frl_colorclient - "colorclient" overrides "template.colorclient"
		frl_colorframe - "colorframe" overrides "template.colorframe"
		frl_colorframeactive - "colorframeactive" overrides "template.colorframeactive"
		frl_colordkshadow - "colordkshadow" overrides "template.colordkshadow"
		frl_colorshadow - "colorshadow" overrides "template.colorshadow"
		frl_colorlight - "colorlight" overrides "template.colorlight"
		frl_colorhighlight - "colorhighlight" overrides "template.colorhighlight"
		frl_colordkwidth - "colordkwidth" overrides "template.colordkwidth"
		frl_colorhlwidth - "colorhlwidth" overrides "template.colorhlwidth"
		frl_fileft - "framei_left" overrides "template.framei_left"
		frl_firight - "framei_right" overrides "template.framei_right"
		frl_fitop - "framei_top" overrides "template.framei_top"
		frl_fibottom - "framei_bottom" overrides "template.framei_bottom"

		frl_nodisable

TFaceComp

See also here: https://wiki.freepascal.org/Reference:_MSEgui/TFace

	- doesn't affect the widget frame but client area of the frame


	template:
		fade:
			color[i]: = colors forming the fade
			direction: = direction where the fade grows to
			gd_(right/up/left/down)

		pos[i]: = relational position of color[i] on the direction (0.0..1.0) extent

			transparency = 	makes the face half-transparent and enlighten the underlying widget  
							with a light source of the selected color 
							( in this case, colors of the face & the widget & the light source 
							simply summarize to higher brightness )

		image:
			see <any image>

		options:

        	*** The fade colors are used not as colors but RGB alpha values ($00 -> opaque, $ff -> transparent) 
			if fao_alpha* are set *** :

				fao_alphafadeall = applies blending to the widget & all its children
				fao_alphafadenochildren = preserves child widgets from blending
		                fao_alphafadeimage = applies blending to "face.image" 


<any face>

	*** extends & customizes "tfacecomp" ***

	fade, image, option
		- see "tfacecomp"
	
	template
		- "tfacecomp" supplying the initial settings

	localprops :
		fal_options - "options" overrides "template.options"
		fal_fadirection - "fade.direction" overrides "template.fade.direction"
		fal_image - "image" overrides "template.image"
		fal_fapos - "fade.pos[i]" overrides "template.fade.pos[i]"
		fal_facolor - "fade.color[i]" overrides "template.fade.color[i]"
		fal_fatransparency - "fade.transparency" overrides "template.fade.transparency"

TBitmapComp

TScalingwidget

   optionsscale : 
		autosizing to provide room for :
		= {"frame.caption" + "offset_*"}
		= "offset_*" if "frame.caption" is unset and "osc_shrink*" is set
	
		= osc_expandx 
			- makes the widget wider to fit the caption if needed

		= osc_shrinkx
			- makes the widget narrower to have no space left & right to the "frame.caption"

		= osc_expandy
			- makes the widget taller to fit the caption if needed

		= osc_shrinky
			- makes the widget lower to have no space up & down to the "frame.caption"

		= osc_invisishrinkx
			- fully h-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

		= osc_invisishrinky
			- fully v-collapses if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

TImageList

TPopupMenu

TMainMenu

Dialog

TFileListview

TFileDialog

TFaceComp

TFileNameEdit

TDirDropdownEdit

TColorEdit

TMemoDialogEdit

TPageSizeSelector

TPageOrientationSelector

Application

TGuiApplication

 tguiapplication = class(tcustomapplication)
  public

   // [re]starts the system timer with the new period and 
   // subscribes the application to be a receiver of the modified "ek_timer" event 
   // ( can check for it in the event queue )
   procedure settimer(const us: integer);

   // finds a window by its winID
   function findwindow(id: winidty; out window: twindow): boolean;

   // finds a window by its ID & adjusts "rect" so that it 
   // fits "bounds_minc*" & "bounds_maxc*" of the found window
   procedure checkwindowrect(winid: winidty; var rect: rectty);

   // initialises the timer and "megraphics"
   procedure initialize;

   // frees the allocated system resources (GDI, event subscription, the timer)
   procedure deinitialize;

   // creates a form instance, it will be shown in "application.run"
   procedure createform(instanceclass: widgetclassty; var reference);

   // invalidates all registered forms ( all their widgets will be redrawn )
   procedure invalidate; 
   
   // calls a nested main event loop, forces processing any pending messages,
   procedure processmessages; override; //handle with care!

   // TRUE if no pending events to process for the application
   function idle: boolean; override;
   
   // requests to indicate waiting ( to show the "watches" cursors )
   procedure beginwait; override;

   // removes the "watches" if no unclosed requests for displaying them,
   // otherwise closes the currently active request
   procedure endwait; override;

   // TRUE if there are unclosed requests for displaying "watches"
   function waiting: boolean;

   // TRUE if ESC has just been pressed
   //  - if all requests for displaying "watches" are closed then refreshes 
   //    the internal list of events ( the GUI-queue -> the app event list)
   function waitescaped: boolean; //true if escape pressed while waiting

   // sets state of the current wait dialogue ( but doesn't close one ) to undefined
   procedure resetwaitdialog;   

   // runs "aexecuteaction" in the main thread in OnIdle mode,
   // then shows a cancellable message,
   // if the one is cancelled then runs "acancelaction" then 
   // either fully clears (if exceptions occur ) 
   // or terminates the execution otherwise,
   // true if not cancelled;
   // "application.processmessages" must be called regularly if "aexecuteaction" is used here,
   // alternatively "aidleaction" can be used, call sleep ( some time ) in order to minimize
   // processor load. 
   // If athread <> nil the function starts and terminates the thread    
   function waitdialog(const athread: tthreadcomp = nil; const atext: msestring = '';
                   const caption: msestring = '';
                   const acancelaction: notifyeventty = nil;
                   const aexecuteaction: notifyeventty = nil): boolean; override;

   // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "cancelled" state
   procedure cancelwait;

   // closes the currently modal waitdialogue with "ok" state
   procedure terminatewait;

   function waitstarted: boolean;   // the last waitdialogue is currently showing for some requests
   function waitcanceled: boolean;  // the last waitdialogue has been cancelled for some request (but can be shown fot others ?)
   function waitterminated: boolean; // the last waitdialogue has been terminated for some request (but can be shown fot others ?) 

   // if called from the main app thread then shows as a modal message describing the exception 
   // otherwise posts an async event for which the message will be called
   procedure showexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = ''); override;

   // posts an async event for which the message describing the exception will be called
   procedure showasyncexception(e: exception; const leadingtext: string = '');

   // "application.errormessage" shows standard error message ( with "ERROR" title ) 
   procedure errormessage(const amessage: msestring); override;

   // [re]calculates timings & position of hint for "ahintedwidget"
   // if "ow_timedhint" in "ahintedwidget.foptionswidget" then iys showtime will be 
   // "defaulthintshowtime" ( an app wide setting, 3sec by default)   
   procedure inithintinfo(var info: hintinfoty; const ahintedwidget: twidget);


   // shows the supplied hint text within "aposrect" with alignment "aplacement" during "ashowtime",
   // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove   
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
              const aposrect: rectty; const aplacement: captionposty = cp_bottomleft;
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
                 // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
                      ); overload;

   // shows the supplied hint text at left-top position"apos" during "ashowtime",
   // the avail ( but not used currenly ) flags are : hfl_show,hfl_custom,hfl_noautohidemove,hfl_noautohidemove   
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const hint: msestring;
              const apos: pointty;
              const ashowtime: integer = defaulthintshowtime; //0 -> inifinite,
                 // -1 defaultshowtime if ow_timedhint in sender.optionswidget
              const aflags: hintflagsty = defaulthintflags
                      ); overload;

   // shows the hint fully defined in "info" for the widget "sender"
   procedure showhint(const sender: twidget; const info: hintinfoty); overload;

   // removes the current hint widget & frees its resources & stops its stop timer
   procedure hidehint;

   // restarts the current hint and its stop timer
   procedure restarthint(const sender: twidget);

   function hintedwidget: twidget; //last hinted widget
   function activehintedwidget: twidget; //nil if no hint active

   // returns helpcontext of active widget, '' if none;   
   function activehelpcontext: msestring;

   // returns helpcontext of the widget under mouse, '' if none;
   function mousehelpcontext: msestring;

   // TRUE if one of the app's window/console is in input focus
   function active: boolean;

   // returns the desktop resolution ( or the virtual one if used )
   function screensize: sizety;

   // returns the (virtual) desktop resolution except the tray area,
   // nil -> current active window
   function workarea(const awindow: twindow = nil): rectty;

   // returns which application window ( a form not an eventwidget, an openglwidget or a windowwidget !) 
   // is active ( provides the input focus ),
   // it's same for all widgets of the form served by this window
   function activewindow: twindow;

/ * A transient window is a descendant of ( "transientfor" ) another window in the stacking order hierarchy */

   // returns a first non-transient ( on top of the app stacking order ) window upward 
   // from the currently active window of the application.
   // or that active window if no such
   function regularactivewindow: twindow;

   // same as "activewindow" but the window must not be released (?)
   function unreleasedactivewindow: twindow;

   // returns the focused widget of the currently active window if one exists
   function activewidget: twidget;

   // returns the widget presenteing the currently active window
   function activerootwidget: twidget;
   
   // returns the window ( not hidden or disabled !) under the screen point "pos"
   function windowatpos(const pos: pointty): twindow;

   // puts to "awidget" the container of widget pointed by "namepath"
   // ( finalizing "." is discarded if found ) ,
   // FALSE if not found, and NIL and TRUE if "namepath" = ''
   function findwidget(const namepath: string; out awidget: twidget): boolean;

   // rebuilds the application's window list accorrding to the current on-screen Z-order of its windows;
   // window list is ordered by "z" - bottom first & top last;
   // invisibles first
   procedure sortzorder;

   // returns a copy of the internal window list of application
   function windowar: windowarty;

   // returns the list of application window winIDs
   function winidar: winidarty;

   // returns the count of the application windows    
   function windowcount: integer;

   // returns the window by its number ( "index" >= 0) in the application window list
   property windows[const index: integer]: twindow read getwindows;

   // returns the lowest visible window in stackorder, 
   // calls "sortzorder" within
   function bottomwindow: twindow;

   // returns the highest visible window in stackorder, 
   // calls "sortzorder" within
   function topwindow: twindow;


   // TRUE if all owned windows pass "CanClose" check or 
   // don't have focused widgets
   function candefocus: boolean;

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive keyboard events
   procedure registeronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving keyboard events
   procedure unregisteronkeypress(const method: keyeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive shortcut events
   procedure registeronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving shortcut events
   procedure unregisteronshortcut(const method: keyeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnWindowActiveChanged" event ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronactivechanged(const method: activechangeeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronwindowdestroyed(const method: windoweventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" form receiving "OnWindowDestroyed" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronwiniddestroyed(const method: winideventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "ApplicationActiveChanged" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronapplicationactivechanged(const method: booleaneventty);

// tcustomapplication

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminated" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminated" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronterminated(const method: notifyeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnTerminateQuery" event ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronterminate(const method: terminatequeryeventty);

   // subscribes the handler "method" to receive "OnIdle" event ( form-wide )
   procedure registeronidle(const method: idleeventty);

   // unsubscribes the handler "method" from receiving "OnIdle" events ( form-wide )
   procedure unregisteronidle(const method: idleeventty);

   // calls "canclose" of all application windows except the "sender" window 
   // if all "canclose"are TRUE then checks "OnTerminateQuery" 
   // for all its subscribers ( usually forms of the application )
   procedure terminate(const sender: twindow = nil); 

   // TRUE as long as a "terminate" call is in progress
   function terminating: boolean;

   // TRUE as long as a "deinitialize" call is in progress
   function deinitializing: boolean;
   
   // returns the current caret object ( the text input focus indicator ) of the application
   / ( this object provides facilities to control position & appearance & visibility & timings of the caret )
   property caret: tcaret read fcaret;

   // returns the current mouse object of the application
   / ( this object provides facitities to control position & appearance of the mouse )   
   property mouse: tmouse read fmouse;

   // simulates mouseparkevent 
   // ( an adjusting mouse movement without user intervention - grid snapping, docking etc ?)
   procedure mouseparkevent;

   // sets mouse position correction for further mouse events,
   // the real position is less the visual one by the supplied shift
   procedure delayedmouseshift(const ashift: pointty);

   // returns/sets a cursor shape used for widgets having their cursor shape set to "cr_default";
   // setting it to "cr_default" restores the individual widget cursor(s)
   property widgetcursorshape: cursorshapety read fwidgetcursorshape write
                                        fwidgetcursorshape;

   // returns/sets the current application-wide cursor shape ( not "watches" if a waiting dialog is currently displayed ! )
   // or request to set a new cursor shape ( app-wide );
   // doesn't change when changing mouse widgets
   // 
   // if called from a non-main app thread & no waiting dialogue displayed then redraws 
   // the cursor immediately;
   // set it to "cr_default" to restore the shape to one set by "widgetcursorshape"
   //
   property cursorshape: cursorshapety; // cr_arrow, cr_*

   // assures the displayed mouse cursor shape to be the shape assigned to the currently under-mouse widget,
   // otherwise "cr_default" 
   procedure updatecursorshape; //restores cursorshape of mousewidget

   // returns a widget of the application where the mouse is currently positioned over
   property mousewidget: twidget read fmousewidget;

   // returns a widget of the application currently "owning" the mouse ( grabbing all mouse input )
   property mousecapturewidget: twidget read fmousecapturewidget;


   // returns/sets a window to become the main window of the application
   // then resets all other application windows to the window group it belongs to ( Linux only );
   //
   // the main window minimizes all windows if minimized;
   property mainwindow: twindow read fmainwindow write setmainwindow;

   // returns which system thread was allocated to the application on its start
   // ( the main thread )
   property thread: threadty read fthread;

   // returns teh widget where a mouse button click occured last time 
   // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
   property buttonpresswidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonpresswidgetbefore;

   // returns teh widget where a mouse button release occured last time 
   // ( to compare with when determinibg whether another widget is clicked )
   property buttonreleasewidgetbefore: twidget read fbuttonreleasewidgetbefore;


   // returns/sets the interval of mouse double click recognition ( in microsecs ),
   // defaults to 0.4 sec
   property dblclicktime: integer read fdblclicktime write fdblclicktime default
                 defaultdblclicktime; //us

// tcustomapplication

   // creates a datamodule instance ( its startup code including "OnLoaded" is executed )
   procedure createdatamodule(instanceclass: msecomponentclassty; var reference);


   // enters the application event loop;
   //
   // once the loop finishes, performs "OnTerminated" for all its subscribers,
   // destroys all application forms ( components & windows )
   procedure run;

   // TRUE if the eventloop is entered
   function running: boolean;

   // returns/sets the application name 
   // ( defaults to the full path to application executable in the native OS format );
   // currently, only for informatiion query purposes
   property applicationname: msestring read fapplicationname write fapplicationname;
   

   // if exclusive "rights" are satisfied for the main thread ( a mutex lock is OK )  & the event loop is in progress 
   // then posts the "event" to the main application thread for asyc processing,
   // otherwise adds the event to the internal list for further handling as soon as the above conditions meet
   procedure postevent(event: tevent);

   // TRUE if never idle since last call,
   // unlocks the application and calls sleep if not mainthread and asleepus >= 0
   function checkoverload(const asleepus: integer = 100000): boolean;

   // returns/sets the application exception handler
   property onexception: exceptioneventty read fonexception write fonexception;

   // if not "eabort" & no unhandled exceptions, 
   // executes the above "OnException" code if assigned 
   // or shows an exception message otherwise;
   procedure handleexception(sender: tobject = nil; 
                                       const leadingtext: string = '');

   // synchronizes the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex),
   // TRUE if the calling thread allready holds the mutex,
   // the mutex is recursive
   function lock: boolean;

   // tries to synchronize the calling thread with the main event loop ( via a mutex)
   function trylock: boolean;

   // releases the mutex if the calling thread holds the mutex,
   // TRUE if no unlock done
   function unlock: boolean;

   // releases the mutex recursively if the calling thread holds the mutex,
   // returns "count" for the below "relockall"
   function unlockall: integer;

   // regains the mutex to serve "count" locks
   procedure relockall(count: integer);

   // creates a syncronize event ( which will fire asyncronously then waits for another thread will allow it to finish ), assigns "proc" to it as the event handler, 
   // then frees all locks temporarily then posts the event to the app event queue & waits fot it to be processed the resores the locks;
   // 
   // TRUE if not aborted, quiet -> shows no exceptions if occurs
   //
   // the "syncronize event" is an event owning a semaphore which can be touched by another thread 
   // thus causing "event.waitfo" to return & to exec the event handler code
   //
   function synchronize(const proc: objectprocty;
                       const quite: boolean = false): boolean;

   // TRUE if the calling ( this function ) thread is the application main thread
   function ismainthread: boolean;

   // TRUE if the currently locked thread is the application main thread
   function islockthread: boolean;

   // waith for "athread" to terminate,
   // does "unlock-relock" around waiting
   procedure waitforthread(athread: tmsethread);

   // post a "nothing-to-do" event for asynchronous processing in the main thread 
   procedure wakeupmainthread;

   // invalidates all registered forms of the application so that their widgets redraw land-specific captions 
   // ( changed by "mseconsts.setlangconsts" ),
   // called internally in "setlangconsts" before return
   procedure langchanged; virtual;

   // returns/sets "aps_terminated" state flag ( no actions ? )
   // this flag is also set internally by "terminate" if not cancelled
   property terminated: boolean read getterminated write setterminated;

   // returns the number of "handleexception" calls having an effect ( a message or the handler code )
   property exceptioncount: longword read fexceptioncount;


private
 // function tinternalapplication.beginmodal(const sender: twindow): boolean;

DB

DBedit

DBfields

TDBwidgetgrid

  Properties:

        anchors - ...
	bounds - ...

	color 
		- color of the grid's client area
	cursor 
		- cursor shape when the mouse is over the client area

	datacols
		colorselect
		linecolor
		linecolorfix
		linewidth
		newrowcol

		options
			co_readonly
			co_nofocus
			co_invisible
			co_disabled
			co_drawfocus
			co_mousemovefocus
			co_lefbuttonfocusonly
			co_focusselect
			co_mouseselect
			co_keyselect
			co_multiselect
			co_resetselectionexit
			co_rowselect
			co_fixwidth
			co_fixpos
			co_fill
			co_proportional
			co_nohscroll
			co_savevalue
			co_savestate
			co_rowfont
			co_rowcolor
			co_zebracolor
			co_nosort
			co_sortdescent
			co_norearrange
			co_cancopy
			co_canpaste
			co_mousescrollrow
			co_rowdatachange

		sortcol
		width

		items[N]
			color
			colorselect
			datalist - ???
			face - see <any face>
			fontselect - see <any font>
			frame - see <any frame>
			linecolor
			linecolorfix
			linewidth
			name
			
			options
	

Report

TRepSpacer

TRecordBand

TrepValueDisp

TRepPageNumdisp

TRepPrintDateDisp

TBandGroup

TTileArea

Design

TGdbMi

TSyntaxEdit

TSyntaxPainter

Comm

TCommPort

TAsciiCommPort

TAsciiProtPort

TCommSelector

General stuff

Properties for all widgets


	name

	anchors

		-----------

		- they control of design/runtime sticking widgets to their parents

		- dimention pair ( top/bottom or left/right ) both set to "false" cause 
		the widget to fit the parent's client area in that dimention;
		this effect may be partial in case of "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents

		*** Return to the look "before dimention fit" is only possible by manual resizing or setting "bounds_*"
		-----------
		an_left 
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts left the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

		an_top
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts up the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

		an_right
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts right the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's right border and the right side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

		an_bottom
			- on run-time, resizes/shifts down the widget to keep the design-set distance 
			between the widget's bottom border and the lower side of parent's client area 
			as the parent resizes, until scrolling begins

	bounds

		cx	- width of the widget
		cxmax, cxmin - design/runtime width of the widget is enforced between "cxmax" and "cxmin"
		cy	- height of the widget
		cymax, cymin - design/runtime height of the widget is enforced between "cymax" and "cymin"
		x	- distance between the widget's left border and the left side of parent's client area 
		y	- distance between the widget's top border and the upper side of parent's client area 


	autosize

		-----------
		- only applicable to widgets with "ow_autosize" set
		- the effect may be partial in case when "bounds_c*max" settings limit the extents
		-----------

		cx - addition to width of the widget (with h-centering post applied)
		cy - addition to height of the widget (with v-centering post applied)

	- color
		= the default color of client area & caption text background
		= may be overwritten:
			* the client area - with "frame.colorclient"
			* the caption BG - with "frame.font.colorbackground"

	- font
		= see {any font}

	- frame
		= see {any frame}

	- face
		= see {any face}

	- hint
		= descriptive text appearing when mouse pointer enters the widget

	- cursor
		= shape of the mouse pointer over the client area of widget (run-time only)

	- visible
		= "true" allow the widget to appear ( run-time only )

	- enabled
		= "true" allows the widget to participate in GUI interaction
		= "false" disallows the widget & its children :
			* processing all events & shortcuts & menu calls
			* auto "CanClose" check

			Also "false" usually paints the widget in color marking 
			the "disabled" state ( usually light gray font color )

	- popupmenu
		= reference to a preset tpopupmenu widget serving the right-click menu

	- taborder
		- {0..N} order number when TAB-key cycling through widgets in the container 

	- tag
		- an integer value bound to this widget instance

	- helpcontext
		= a string returned by "(active/mouse)helpcontext" methods of the owning form 
		  when this widget is focused or under mouse in the active window

	- zorder
		= reading: finds the current Z-order of the widget's window
		= setting: if the value = 0 then lowers the widget's window in the stacking hierarchy, otherwise rises


	optionswidget:

		ow_background
			- keeps the window/widget on bottom of the Z-order stack.

		ow_top
			- keeps the window/widget in foreground

		ow_noautosizing
			- when docking, not to resize for the docking area

		ow_mousefocus
			- "false" here disables focusing the widget with mouse
			  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on mouse clicks )

		ow_tabfocus
			- "false" here disables focusing the widget with "TAB" key
			  ( and "OnFocus" doesn't fire on TAB pressed )

		ow_parenttabfocus
			- enters the childs on TAB-focusing then returns to the widget after 
			sequential TAB-ing through its child widgets,
			otherwise TAB-ing cycles on the children if entered

		ow_arrowfocus
			- allows the widget ( and its children in turn ) to be focused with 
			the arrow keys 

		ow_subfocus, ow_arrowfocusin, ow_arrowfocusout
			- in case of arrow keys focusing enabled for child-containing widget, 
			determine behaviour on entering & leaving the widget, see the below table:

			ow_subfocus	| ow_arrowfocusin |	ow_arrowfocusout | effect

			   FALSE           FALSE             FALSE         entering-/leaving-
			   FALSE           FALSE             TRUE          entering-/leaving+
			   FALSE           TRUE              FALSE         entering(nearest)+/leaving-
			   FALSE           TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+
			   TRUE            FALSE             FALSE         entering(last focused)+/leaving-
			   TRUE            FALSE             TRUE          entering(last focused)+/leaving+
			   TRUE            TRUE              FALSE         entering(nearest)+/leaving-
			   TRUE            TRUE              TRUE          entering(nearest)+/leaving+

			- "entering" is focusing on a child within the widget
			- "leaving"  is return from last child onto the widget's level
			- "nearest" is the child closest on the arrow direction
			- "last focused" is the child focused on last leaving the widget
 
			*** The Up/Down arrow keys can leave from the children circle, 
				but Left/Right can only toggle between the children ***

			*** mouse entering/leaving isn't controllable by these options


		ow_focusbackonesc 
			- on pressing "Esc", returns input focus to the previously focused widget

		ow_noparentshortcut

			*** disables processing of delegated ( from the parent ) shortcuts *** 

			- "true" here disables processing shortcuts	if they're delegated 
			from the parent widget ( obviously, not processed by the parent )

		ow_nochildshortcut

			*** disables delegating shortcuts to the parent for taking decision *** 

			- if "true" then the widget tries to process it by oneself 
			otherwise it's passed to the parent widget for further chaining

			*** A shortcut can only be processed once ( by one widget ) ***

		ow_canclosenil
			- "true" here allows to continue even if there's contained widget(s) 
			not passing "CanClose" check

		ow_mousetransparent
			- "true" here causes the widget oneself ( not its contained ones ) 
			not to react to mouse events ( just allow them through to the children )

		ow_mousewheel
			- enables/disables {scrolling/navigating} with wheel of ImPS/2 etc mouse

		ow_noscroll
			- don't use screen image scrolling for twidget.scrollrect, 
			redraw the whole scrolled widget rectangle instead;
			sometimes needed with background fades.

		ow_nochildpaintclip
			- 

		ow_destroywidgets
			- "true" here causes calling "free" for all containing widgets as well

		ow_hinton
			- to show the hint even in case of hinting is disabled on the parent
			( "parent.ow_hintoff= true & parent.ow_hinton= false" )

		ow_hintoff 
			- "true" here combined with "ow_hinton=false" fully disables displaying the hint

		ow_multiplehint 
			- "true" here causes the widget to redisplay its hint on each {>3px} move within the widget oneself

        	ow_timedhint 
			- "true" here causes hint of the widget to disappear after a timed inteval (about 2 secs by default)

		ow_fontlineheight (design-time only)
			- causes "extraspace" of the last text line to be drawn, 
			in turn it causes adjustment of widget height if "ow_autoscale" is set
			
			*** makes sence only if "ow_autoscale=true" & ow_autosize=false & "extraspace <> 0" ***

		ow_fontglyphheight (design-time only)
			- causes only interline "extraspace"-s to be drawn, opposite to "ow_fontlineheight" 

		ow_autoscale (design-time only)
			- causes that if the contents change (design OR run-time) so that its' height changes 
			then the widget will be v-scaled as well

		ow_autosize (design-time only)
			- causes that widget's height & width & client area adjust so that to provide space for contents of the client area
			- no design-time change of height/width are possible as long as this option is in effect

		ow_autosizeanright
			- when autosizing & {an_right isn't set}, the design-set right margin against the parent is preserved

		ow_autosizeanbottom
			- when autosizing & {an_bottom isn't set}, the design-set bottom margin against the parent is preserved

	optionsskin:

		- osc_noskin
		- osc_framebuttononly
		- osc_container


	Methods:

	  // tmsecomponent

		// (re)draws the widget according to the related skin if apllicable;
		//
		// also called internally by "loaded" procedure ( before "OnLoaded" code ),
		// by ShowMessage ( for the internal widgets of the message dialogue ), 
		// when creating tab & form & menu widgets
		procedure updateskin(const recursive: boolean = false);

		// TRUE if the instance is created but not yet ready 
		// for interaction & accessing data & appearance change & receiving events etc
		// ( the stage between firing "OnCreate" & "OnLoaded" )
		function loading: boolean;
	
	 {$ifdef FPC}
		procedure setinline(value: boolean); // ?
		procedure setancestor(value: boolean); // ?
	 {$endif}

		// TRUE if all conditios are OK for executing the code of "event" ( a handler must be assigned to the event )
		function canevent(const event: tmethod): boolean;


		// Shortly, replaces the persistent storage of the widget
		//
		// if {value <> nil} then 
		//	- if "instance" is nil then calls "createproc" to create the instance,
		//    then assigns the instance's value:= "value" 
		// otherwise frees "instance"
		procedure setoptionalobject(const value: tpersistent; var instance;
                        createproc: createprocty);

		// creates the persistent storage of the widget via calling "createproc"
		procedure getoptionalobject(const instance: tobject; createproc: createprocty);

		// obtains & puts to "obj" a CORBA interface entry for "aintf" (GUID,...)
		function getcorbainterface(const aintf: ptypeinfo; out obj) : boolean;

        // TRUE if the widget is owned, or "self" otherwise
		function checkowned(component: tcomponent): boolean; 

        // TRUE if the widget is owner, or "self" otherwise
		function checkowner(component: tcomponent): boolean; 

		// return the top-most widget in owner chain starting from this widget
		function rootowner: tcomponent;

		// return the array of owning widgets starting from this widget
		// componentarty[0] is the widget oneself
		function getrootcomponentpath: componentarty;

        // returns items of objeclinker ( which notify this widget )
        // and free notify list ( which are notified by this widget ),
        // duplicates are removed.
        //	
        // Notifies mainly relate to insertion/removal operation on widgets
        // The notify list is maintained by FreeNotification & RemoveFreeNotification
		function linkedobjects: objectarty;

		// sends "event" recursively to child widgets until no more children or 
		// the event is processed ( cea_processed ) by one of the children,
		// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
		procedure sendcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent; 
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);

		// sends "event" to each of owning widgets downward from the root owner,
		// "event" will be destroyed if destroyevent= true and not async
		procedure sendrootcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent;
                                        const destroyevent: boolean = true);

		// posts an async "atag"-ged event to be handled by oneself
		procedure asyncevent(atag: integer = 0);

		// posts a "tcomponentevent" instance from sender=self, 
		// "kind" is defined when creating the event, 
		// and "tag" may be adjusted after creation
		procedure postcomponentevent(const event: tcomponentevent);

		// returns the classname of the widget if the widget is toplevel, 
		// and "tmsecomponent" otherwise )
		property moduleclassname: string read getmoduleclassname;

		// returns the classname of the widget as the entry of its constructor
		// ( button => tbutton, datamodule => tdm1mo, form => ttstfo, dbstringedit => tdbstringedit,.. )
		property actualclassname: string read getactualclassname;

		// returns "fmsecomponentstate"
		// ( a set of cs_ismodule,cs_endreadproc,cs_loadedproc,cs_noload, cs_hasskin,cs_noskin )
		property msecomponentstate: msecomponentstatesty read fmsecomponentstate;

		// returns/sets a pointer associated with the widget
		// ( contrary to the integer "tag", allows to use an arbitary data type 
		// for associating data )
		property tagpo: pointer read ftagpo write ftagpo;

		// returns/sets a string identifying the widget in the help system
		property helpcontext: msestring read gethelpcontext write fhelpcontext;

	// twidget

		// creates an instance of the widget, owned by "aowner" if not NIL
		constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;

		destructor destroy; override;

		// ??
		procedure afterconstruction; override;

		// rescales the widget frame ( if assigned ) then owned widgets ( if exist, recursively ) then bounds_* then the font ( if assigned )
		// called before inserting in parentwidget,
		// calls "scale(ascale)",
		// no visual repainting
		procedure initnewcomponent(const ascale: real); virtual;

 		// restores the "fontheight" to "font.glyphheight" if "ow_fontglyphheight" or
 		// to "font.lineheight" if "ow_fontlineheight" otherwise,
		// ascale is ignored ?
		// calls "synctofontheight->setfontheight",
		// called after inserting in parentwidget,
		// no visual repainting
		procedure initnewwidget(const ascale: real); virtual;

		// creates the widget frame if not yet created
		procedure createframe;

		// creates the widget face if not yet  created
		procedure createface;

		// creates the widget font if not yet  created
		procedure createfont;

		// checks ws_loadlock and csdestroing too
		function isloading: boolean;

		// returns "widgetstatety" - a set of (
		// ws_visible,ws_enabled,ws_active,ws_entered,ws_entering,ws_exiting,
		// ws_focused,ws_mouseinclient,ws_wantmousebutton,ws_wantmousemove,
		// ws_wantmousefocus,ws_iswidget,ws_opaque,ws_nopaint,
		// ws_clicked,ws_mousecaptured,ws_clientmousecaptured,
		// ws_loadlock,ws_loadedproc,ws_showproc,ws_minclientsizevalid,
		// ws_showed,ws_hidden, //used in tcustomeventwidget
		// ws_destroying,ws_staticframe,ws_staticface,ws_isvisible
		//
		// iframe
		function widgetstate: widgetstatesty;

		// returns "widgetstate1ty" - a set of (
		// (ws1_childscaled,ws1_fontheightlock,
		// ws1_widgetregionvalid,ws1_rootvalid,
		// ws1_anchorsizing,ws1_isstreamed,
		// ws1_scaled, //used in tcustomscalingwidget
		// ws1_noclipchildren,
		// ws1_nodesignvisible,ws1_nodesignframe,ws1_nodesignhandles,
		// ws1_nodesigndelete,ws1_designactive,
		// ws1_fakevisible,ws1_nominsize //used for report size calculations
		// )
		property widgetstate1: widgetstates1ty read fwidgetstate1;
		
			* this set of states is needed because the max FPC set size is 32 
			  thus "widgetstate1ty" can't fit all states

		// TRUE if the widget is contained within another widget
		// ( tcomponent stuff )
		function hasparent: boolean; override;               

		// returns the parent component if it's a widget or the grandparent otherwise
		function getparentcomponent: tcomponent; override;   // tcomponent

		// TRUE if "awidget" is an ascendant or the widget or they are the same widget
		function checkdescendent(awidget: twidget): boolean;
		
		// TRUE if app is running and the widget owns the caret or the caret widget
		function hascaret: boolean;

        // TRUE if "winid" allocated and not loading and not destroying,
        // all widgets on a form have "winid" of this form ( a real window allocated by the OS )
        // thus have this function TRUE
		function windowallocated: boolean;

		// TRUE if presents a valid toplevelwindow with assigned "winid"
		function ownswindow: boolean;

		// invalidated area of the widget, the origin is "clientpos" against the roor widget
		function updaterect: rectty; 

		// calls recursively "canclose" for all contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded! ),
		// TRUE if none of the widgets return FALSE
		//
		// more specialized widgets may have "canclose" overridden 
		// to perform more work than just this call recursion
		// ( not null or range check,.. )
		//
		// "onclosequery" must also pass the check if assigned, for the function to succeed
		function canclose(const newfocus: twidget = nil): boolean; virtual;

        // checks "canclose" first for focused widget of the window ( form,.. ) 
        // if it is a descendant of the widget or the widget oneself,
        // then continues with subwidgets of the widget;
        // also - finishes editing ( snapshots "value" ) in the focused widget before checking
		function canparentclose(const newfocus: twidget): boolean; overload;

		// the above function but with the preserved focus
		function canparentclose: boolean; overload;
                   //newfocus = window.focusedwidget      

		function canfocus: boolean; virtual;
		function setfocus(aactivate: boolean = true): boolean; virtual;//true if ok
		procedure nextfocus; //sets inputfocus to then next appropriate widget

		function findtabfocus(const ataborder: integer): twidget;
                       //nil if cannot focus

		function firsttabfocus: twidget;
		function lasttabfocus: twidget;
		function nexttaborder(const down: boolean = false): twidget;

		function focusback(const aactivate: boolean = true): boolean;
                               //false if focus not changed

		function parentcolor: colorty;
		function actualcolor: colorty; virtual;
		function actualopaquecolor: colorty;
		function backgroundcolor: colorty;
		function translatecolor(const acolor: colorty): colorty;

		procedure widgetevent(const event: twidgetevent); virtual;

		procedure sendwidgetevent(const event: twidgetevent);
                              //event will be destroyed

		procedure release; override;

		function show(const modal: boolean = false; const transientfor: twindow = nil): modalresultty; virtual;

		procedure hide;
		procedure activate(const abringtofront: boolean = true); virtual;
                             //show and setfocus

		procedure bringtofront;
		procedure sendtoback;
		procedure stackunder(const predecessor: twidget);

		procedure paint(const canvas: tcanvas); virtual;
		procedure update; virtual;
		procedure scrollwidgets(const dist: pointty);

		procedure scrollrect(const dist: pointty; const rect: rectty; scrollcaret: boolean);
                             //origin = paintrect.pos

		procedure scroll(const dist: pointty);
                            //scrolls paintrect and widgets

		procedure getcaret;
		procedure scrollcaret(const dist: pointty);
		function mousecaptured: boolean;
		procedure capturemouse(grab: boolean = true);
		procedure releasemouse;
		procedure capturekeyboard;
		procedure releasekeyboard;
		procedure synctofontheight; virtual;

		procedure dragevent(var info: draginfoty); virtual;
		procedure dochildscaled(const sender: twidget); virtual;

		procedure invalidatewidget;     //invalidates whole widget
		procedure invalidate;           //invalidates clientrect
		procedure invalidaterect(const rect: rectty; org: originty = org_client);
		procedure invalidateframestate;

		procedure invalidateframestaterect(const rect: rectty; 
                                        const org: originty = org_client);   
		function hasoverlappingsiblings(arect: rectty): boolean; //origin = pos

		function window: twindow;
		function rootwidget: twidget;

		function parentofcontainer: twidget;
            //parentwidget.parentwidget if parentwidget has not ws_iswidget,
            //parentwidget otherwise

		property parentwidget: twidget read fparentwidget write setparentwidget;
		function getrootwidgetpath: widgetarty; //root widget is last

		// number of contained widgets ( the widget oneself excluded ! )
		function widgetcount: integer;

		function parentwidgetindex: integer; //index in parentwidget.widgets, -1 if none
		property widgets[const index: integer]: twidget read getwidgets;
		function widgetatpos(var info: widgetatposinfoty): twidget; overload;
		function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty): twidget; overload;

		function widgetatpos(const pos: pointty; 
                   const state: widgetstatesty): twidget; overload;

		property taborderedwidgets: widgetarty read gettaborderedwidgets;

		function findtagwidget(const atag: integer; const aclass: widgetclassty): twidget;
              //returns first matching descendent

		property container: twidget read getcontainer;
		function containeroffset: pointty;
		function childrencount: integer; virtual;
		property children[const index: integer]: twidget read getchildwidgets; default;

		function childatpos(const pos: pointty; 
                   const clientorigin: boolean = true): twidget; virtual;

		function getsortxchildren: widgetarty;
		function getsortychildren: widgetarty;
		property focusedchild: twidget read ffocusedchild;
		property focusedchildbefore: twidget read ffocusedchildbefore;

		function mouseeventwidget(const info: mouseeventinfoty): twidget;

		function checkdescendent(widget: twidget): boolean;
                    //true if widget is descendent or self

		function checkancestor(widget: twidget): boolean;
                    //true if widget is ancestor or self

		function containswidget(awidget: twidget): boolean;

		procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget); overload;

		procedure insertwidget(const awidget: twidget; const apos: pointty); overload; virtual;
                 //widget can be child

		function iswidgetclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty; const caption: boolean = false): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect
 		//or in frame.caption if caption = true, origin = pos

		function isclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonrelease, button is mb_left, clicked and pos in clientrect

		function isdblclick(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
		// and timedlay to last buttonpress is short

		function isdblclicked(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype in [et_buttonpress,et_butonrelease], button is mb_left,
		// and timedlay to last same buttonevent is short

		function isleftbuttondown(const info: mouseeventinfoty): boolean;
		//true if eventtype = et_butonpress, button is mb_left, pos in clientrect
		//origin = paintrect.pos

		widgetrect: the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption

			paintrect: the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption

			clientrect: virtual area which 
				- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
				- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect", 
				  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling
		
	// the coord of outer top-left corner against the toplevel form = the window owner,
	// including the frame & frame caption 
		function rootpos: pointty; 

	// the coord of the outer top-left corner against the screen ( the WM decorations aren't counted in )
	// includes the frame & frame caption 
		property screenpos: pointty; 

	//  the coord of the outer top-left corner against the parent widget,
	// including the frame & frame caption 
		property widgetrect: rectty; 
		property pos: pointty; // =widgetrect.pos
		property size: sizety; // =widgetrect.size
		property left: integer; // =bounds_x
		property right: integer; //widgetrect.x + widgetrect.cx, sets cx;
		property top: integer;  // =bounds_y
		property bottom: integer; //widgetrect.y + widgetrect.cy, sets cy;
		property width: integer; // =bounds_cx
		property height: integer; // =bounds_cy
		function widgetsizerect: rectty;          //pos = nullpoint

    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
    //  except the frame & frame caption 
		function paintrect: rectty;
		function paintpos: pointty;
		function paintsize: sizety;
		function innerpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
		function clientwidgetrect: rectty; // mainly equals to paintrect
		function clientwidgetpos: pointty;
		function clippedpaintrect: rectty; // mainly equals to  but clipped by all parentpaintrects
		function innerwidgetrect: rectty;     // mainly equals to paintrect
		function innerclientwidgetpos: pointty;

    // the coord of the paint area ( paintrect ) against own outer top-left corner ( against "widgetrect=pos" )
    //  except the frame caption 
		function framerect: rectty; // =paintrect except the frame caption area
		function framepos: pointty;
		function framesize: sizety;

    // the coord of the client area ( clientrect )  against the paint area ( paintrect )
    //  usually these areas match
		function clientrect: rectty;
		property clientsize: sizety;
		property clientwidth: integer;
		property clientheight: integer;
		property clientpos: pointty;

    // the coord of the paint area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
		function paintrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,

    // the coord of the client area of the parent against the paint area of this widget
		function clientrectparent: rectty; //nullrect if parent = nil,

	// the coord of the inner area against the client area ( clientrect )
		function innerclientrect: rectty;  // mainly equals to clientrect
		function innerclientsize: sizety;
		function innerclientpos: pointty;

		function framewidth: sizety;              //widgetrect.size - paintrect.size
		function clientframewidth: sizety;        //widgetrect.size - clientrect.size
		function innerclientframewidth: sizety;   //widgetrect.size - innerclientrect.size
		function innerframewidth: sizety;         //clientrect.size - innerclientrect.size  

    // the coord of the paint area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
		function paintparentpos: pointty;    //origin = parentwidget.pos

    // the coord of the client area against the widgetrect(pos) of the parent
		function clientparentpos: pointty;   //origin = parentwidget.pos

    // the coord of the widgetrect(pos) against the client area of parent
		property parentclientpos: pointty;


		function clientpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		function widgetpostoclientpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		function widgetpostopaintpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		function paintpostowidgetpos(const apos: pointty): pointty;
		procedure scale(const ascale: real); virtual;


		property minsize: sizety read fminsize write setminsize;
		property maxsize: sizety read fmaxsize write setmaxsize;
		function maxclientsize: sizety; virtual;


		property anchors: anchorsty read fanchors write setanchors default defaultanchors;
		property defaultfocuschild: twidget read getdefaultfocuschild write setdefaultfocuschild;


		procedure changeclientsize(const delta: sizety); //asynchronous

		function getcanvas(aorigin: originty = org_client): tcanvas;

		function showing: boolean;
               //true if self and all ancestors visible and window allocated

		function isenabled: boolean;
               //true if self and all ancestors enabled

		function active: boolean;
		function entered: boolean;

		function activeentered: boolean; 
			//true if entered and window is regularactivewindow or inactivated

		function focused: boolean;
		function clicked: boolean;

		function indexofwidget(const awidget: twidget): integer;

		procedure changedirection(const avalue: graphicdirectionty;
                                            var dest: graphicdirectionty); virtual;

		// (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally within the parent's client area 
		// so that awidget[i] were placed next each other 
		// at h-space dist[i], starting from "startx" with the right margin "endmargin";
		// 
		// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining h-spaces are taken 
		// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
		// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
		// 
		// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to h-resize to provide the margin :
		//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_left,an_right] set then the first of such is resized
		//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is h-resized 
		// 
		procedure placexorder(
				const startx: integer; 
				const dist: array of integer;
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
                const endmargin: integer = minint);

		// (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area 
		// so that awidget[i] were placed upper/lower each other 
		// at v-space dist[i], starting from "starty" with the bottom margin "endmargin";
		// 
		// if the number of "dist" is fewer than the number of "awidgets" then the remaining v-spaces are taken 
		// as the last "dist[i]" or "0" if none;
		// if the number of "dist" is more than the number of "awidgets" then the extra dist[i] are discarded
		// 
		// non-zero "endmargin" causes one of awdidget[i] to v-resize to provide the margin :
		//  - if one or more of awidgets[i] have [an_top,an_bottom] set then the first of such is resized
		//    otherwise the last awidgets[i] is v-resized 
		// 
		procedure placeyorder(
				const starty: integer; 
				const dist: array of integer;
                const awidgets: array of twidget;
                const endmargin: integer = minint);
               //origin = clientpos, endmargin by size adjust of widgets 
               //with [an_top,an_bottom], minint -> no change

		// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" horizontally  within the parent's client area so that 
		// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] :
		// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_left" set ) so that they right borders match the right border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_right" set ) so that they left borders match the left border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they Y-axes match the Y-axe of awidgets[0]
		//
		// mainly applicable for v-stacked widgets since h-stacked may overlap after such alignment
		//
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
		function alignx(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;


		// if {mode <> wam_none} then (re)arranges "awidgets" vertically within the parent's client area so that 
		// awidgets[0] stays on its place but awidgets[1..N] : 
		// - if {mode = wam_end} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_top" set ) so that they bottom borders match the bottom border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_start} then awidgets[i>=1] move or resize ( if "anchors.al_bottom" set ) so that they top borders match the top border of awidgets[0]
		// - if {mode = wam_center} then awidgets[i>=1] move so that they X-axes match the X-axe of awidgets[0]
		//
		// mainly applicable for h-stacked widgets since v-stacked may overlap after such alignment
		//
        // returns the reference point ( the coord of awidgets[0] )
		function aligny(const mode: widgetalignmodety;
                        const awidgets: array of twidget): integer;

		function actualcursor: cursorshapety; virtual;


	Event handlers:

	- onactivate

		 fires :

		= on receiving input focus, just before "OnFocus"
			
		= forms specific :
			* on 1-st display of the form after "OnLoaded" ( from "Loaded" procedure)
			* on switch back from another apllication/WM ( "oe_activate" event )
			* after closure of a descendant form
			* on minimizing/maximizing the form

	- onchildscaled

		 fires :

		= on child/children resizing due to font height change

		= form widget: once "form.container" {scrolling widget} is loaded

	- ondeactivate
		 fires 
			= form widget: when the form looses input focus
			= non-form widget: when the widget looses input focus

	- ondefocus

		fires 
		= on disabling the widget

	= form widget: if another form is focused
		= non-form widget: if another widget is focused

	- onenter
		= fires on any way of taking parent-wide focus as soon as 
		the parent stores the new child's order, before "OnActivate" & "OnFocus"

	- onexit
		= fires last on parent-wide lossing focus, after "OnDefocus" & "OnDeactivate"
		= for top-level ( not in a container ) forms, doesn't fire

	- onfocus
		fires 
			= once the existing widget takes the focus 
			= on showing the widget's form if the widget has the lowest "TabOrder"

	- onfontheightdelta
		fires
			= if [ow_fontglyphheight OR ow_fontlineheight ] AND {the
			new font height differs from the previos one}
			= before the parent redraws this widget

	- onpopup
		fires :
			= on calling a popup-menu ( with "RightClick" ), once the menu items of the current level are loaded
			( before building the submenus ) 

	- onresize

		= fires on creating/(changing size)/(min-max restoring) of widget, 
		before actual redrawing

		= rechecks if there's real work to do

	- onshowhint
		= fires when a installed hint is activated or on "aplication.showint" called
		= since called last, allows to adjust the default behavior

	- onbeforeupdateskin
		= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) before applying the skin

	- onafterupdateskin
		= fires in "updateskin" ( the widget is loaded etc ) once the skin is applied

TWidget stuff

   Properties:    
		- name
		- anchors
		- bounds
		- color
		- enabled
		- visible
		- <face> : see {any face}
		- <frame> : see {any frame}
	    - hint
	    - helpcontext
	    - tag
	    - taborder
	    - cursor
	    - optionswidget
	    - optionsskin
	    - popupmenu
    
		twidget's event handlers:
    
			- on(de)activate
			- onbeforeupdateskin
			- onafterupdateskin
			- onchildscaled
			- onfontheightdelta
			- on(de)focus
			- onenter
			- onmove
			- onpopup
			- onresize
			- onshowhint
      
	align_glue : 
	  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the align mode )
		- wam_none
		- wam_start
		- wan_center
		- wm_end

	align_leader : 
		the widget ( incl another spacer, splitter or layouter ) against which the alignment applies ( the reference widget )

	align_mode : 
	  ( inner anchoring mode within widget group, in the align mode )
		- wam_none
		- wam_start
		- wan_center
		- wm_end

// Place mode:

      
	place_mindist, place_maxdist:
		- in the place(ment) mode, limits distance between widgets
		  ( these distance once calculated also define side margins if applicable )

	place_mode: 
	  ( outer anchoring mode for widget group, in the place mode )
		- wam_none
		- wam_start
		- wan_center
		- wm_end

	place_options:
		- plo_endmargin
			= to resize a widget so that it "eats" extra space if it occurs
			
			* only applicable in the place mode, with a limiting value of "place_maxdist" and:

			  1) {place_mode <> wam_none}
			or
			  2) {place_mode = wam_end} and {plo_propmargin in place_options}

			For the exact look, see above


		- plo_propmargin
			= виджеты расставляются теснее так, чтобы образовались отступы перед и после,
			  причем расстояние между центрами виджетов было бы таким же, 
			  как и растояние между серединами крайних виджетов и соотв. границами зоны расстановки

		- plo_syncmaxautosize
			= see above

		- plo_synccaptiondistx
			= see above

			  * affects widgets with opposite cp_left/right set as well	
			  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" among all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget
              * don't set cfo_captiondistouter here !

		- plo_synccaptiondisty
			= see above

			  * affects also widgets with opposite cp_top/bottom set	
			  * the minimal before-adjustment "captiondist" amongst all widgets limits "captiondist" for each of the widget

              ! here, don't set "cfo_captiondistouter" for affected widgets !

		- plo_syncpaintwidth
			= see above

		- plo_syncpaintheight
			= see above

		- plo_scalesize
			= see above


	dist_left, dist_right, dist_top, dist_bottom : 
		= margins between most outer edge the layouter and 
		  the corresponding linked widget

		* see "tspacer" for detail

	linkleft,linkright,linktop,linkbottom : see "tspacer"

	options:
		- spao_glueright, spao_gluebottom: 
			= set the adjustment dependencies between the layouter and its link_* widgets

			* see "tspacer" for more details

	// which mode of widget placement to apply - see above
	optionslayout: 
		- lao_alignx
		- lao_aligny
		- lao_placex
		- lao_placey
		- lao_scalewidth
		- lao_scaleheight
		- lao_scaleleft
		- lao_scaletop
		
		* lao_place* & lao_align* can't be combined for one direction

	optionsscale: 
	  
	  * cause the layouter to provide full space for the widgets as long as they expand/shrink/move

		- osc_expandx 
			= allocates more h-space if needed

		- osc_shrinkx
			= removes extra h-space if occurred

		- osc_expandy
			= allocates more v-space if needed

		- osc_shrinky
			= removes extra v-space if occurred

		- osc_invisishrinkx
			= fully h-collapses the layouter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

		- osc_invisishrinky
			= fully v-collapses the layoter if "visible=false" ( run-time only )

	optionsskin:
		= see <any widget>


	Methods:

		constructor create(aowner: tcomponent); override;

Public stuff

	(f)window: 
		the OS-allocated ( root = toplevel ) window common for all widgets of this window
		
		* "widget.fwindow.fowner = widget.self" in case of the widget present the root "fwindow" 
		  ( owns the window )

	(f)rootpos: 
		position of the widget in the coord of toplevel window not the nearest parent widget alone,
		calculated as sum of such positions ( fwidgetrect.pos ) starting from the toplevel through the
                chain of all parents up to the current widget;
		"nullpoint" (0,0) for toplevel widgets ( window-owning forms,..)

	screenpos:
		- coord aginst the top-left corner of screen
		- WM decoration & title aren't parts of the widget !

	widgetrect: 
		the widget on-screen area including its frame & frame caption

	paintrect: 
		the widget on-screen area except its frame & frame caption

	clientrect: 
		virtual area which 
			- for non-scrolling widgets, equals to "paintrect", with its "pos:= (0,0)"
			- for scrolling widgets, may be bigger than "paintrect", 
		 	  also may shift ( change its "pos" ) when scrolling

			* "t*grid" aren't such scrollable widgets since their virtual height would be limited by 
			  the X11 "+-32000" limitation, 
			  so example of such widgets are tscrollbox, "tform.container" etc

	framerect: 
		the widget on-screen area except its frame caption but including inner & outer frame

	****************

	// releases all thread locks then post the event to the app event queue and
	// waits for the event handler finishes ( signalled by "sye_ok on a semaphore )
	// finally restores the locks
    // true if the handler is not aborted
	function synchronizeevent(const aevent: tsynchronizeevent): boolean;

    // translates "point" coord against "source" widgetrect to "dest" widgetrect
	//
	//   * nil "source" = from screen coord 
	//   * nil "dest" = to screen coord
	procedure translatewidgetpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);

	// the function-framed version of "translatewidgetpoint1"
	function translatewidgetpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;

	// rect isntead of point, 
	// if dest = nil then to screen 
    // if source = nil then against screen
	function translatewidgetrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
	//-----------------
    // translates "point" coord against "source" paintrect to "dest" paintrect
	//   * nil "source" = from screen coord 
	//   * nil "dest" = to screen coord
	procedure translatepaintpoint1(var point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget);

	// the function-framed version of "translatepaintpoint1"
	function translatepaintpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;

	// rect isntead of point, 
	// if dest = nil then to screen 
    // if source = nil then against screen
	function translatepaintrect(const rect: rectty;const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
    //-----------------
    // translates "point" coord against "source" clientrect to "dest" clienttrect
	//   * nil "source" = from screen coord 
	//   * nil "dest" = to screen coord
	procedure translateclientpoint1(var point: pointty;
                    const source,dest: twidget);

	// the function-framed version of "translateclientpoint1"
	function translateclientpoint(const point: pointty; const source,dest: twidget): pointty;

	// rect isntead of point, 
	// if dest = nil then to screen 
    // if source = nil then against screen
	function translateclientrect(const rect: rectty; const source,dest: twidget): rectty;
    //-----------------

	// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.x" coords
	//   - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
	//   - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
	procedure sortwidgetsxorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);

	// (re)sorts "awidgets" in order of increasing their "widgetrect.y" coords
	//   - if parent = nil then the coords are against individual parent of each of "awidgets"
	//   - if parent is supplied then the coords are against this parent
	procedure sortwidgetsyorder(var awidgets: widgetarty; const parent: twidget = nil);

	// for each  of "widgets", calculates its autosized client area ( min size rect to fit the caption, etc )
    //   - both hor & ver sizes of client area of each of "widgets" are adjusted to the max of the above calculated areas,
	//	   as the result - client areas of all widgets become identically v+h sized
    // 
    //   * right & bottom anchored margins of each widget are preserved
	procedure syncmaxautosize(const widgets: array of twidget);

	// for each  of "widgets", width of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that 
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) widths of all widgets become identical 
    // to the external widht of the widest widget
    //    
    //   * if "awidth" >= 0 then no determining the widest widget is taken and
    //     "awidth" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
    //   * right anchored margins of each widget are lost
	procedure syncminframewidth(const awidgets: array of twidget;
                               const awidth: integer = -1);

	// for each  of "widgets", height of client area of each of "widgets" is adjusted so that 
    // external ( by the outer border of frame ) heights of all widgets become identical 
    // to the external height of the highest widget
    //    
    //   * if "aheight" >= 0 then no determining the highest widget is taken and
    //     "aheight" is adjusted to instead, for all widgets
    //   * bottom anchored margins of each widget are lost
	procedure syncminframeheight(const awidgets: array of twidget; const aheight: integer = -1);

Projects using MSEgui